Samsung Clx 6220 Users Manual Del_toc__scx_6250_guide_english

CLX-6250 to the manual b8447c26-927e-4a65-a4eb-5399edb3b6b1

: Samsung Samsung-Clx-6220-Users-Manual-275219 samsung-clx-6220-users-manual-275219 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 155 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CLX-6220 Series

CLX-6250 Series

Multi-Functional Printer

User’s Guide

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.

Copyright_ 1

copyright

© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.

Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.

•Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

•PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

•Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.

•UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.

•TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

•All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.

Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.

REV. 2.00

Safety information_ 1

safety information

These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any

potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.

Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and

instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place

for future reference.

Important safety symbols

This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of

danger.

Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:

Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.

Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.

Do not attempt.

Do not disassemble.

Do not touch.

Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.

Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.

Call the service center for help.

Follow directions explicitly.

Operating environment

Warning

Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the

electrical outlet is not grounded.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power

cord.

► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be

crushed by a heavy object could result in electric

shock or fire.

Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,

small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes,

etc.).

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not

handle the plug with wet hands.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Safety information_ 2

Caution

During an electrical storm or for a period of

non-operation, remove the power plug from the

electrical outlet.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not

attempt to force it in.

► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this

could result in electric shock.

Be careful, the paper output area is hot.

► Burns could occur.

Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC

interface cords.

► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your

pet.

If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears

damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections

and request assistance from qualified service personnel.

► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.

If the machine does not operate properly after these

instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all

interface connections and request assistance from qualified

service personnel.

► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.

If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in

performance, unplug the machine from all interface

connections and request assistance from qualified service

personnel.

► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.

Operating method

Caution

Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.

► It can cause damage to the machine.

When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the

paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children

to touch.

► Children may be burned.

Be careful not to put your hand between the machine

and paper tray.

► You may get injured.

When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers

or sharp metal objects.

► It can cause damage to the machine.

Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.

► This could result in elevated component temperatures which

can cause damage or fire.

Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output

tray.

► It could cause damage to the machine.

Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing

jammed paper.

► You may get hurt.

This machine's power interception device is the power cord.

► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from

the electrical outlet.

If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,

makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,

immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the

machine.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Safety information_ 3

Installation / Moving

Warning

Do not place the machine in an area with dust,

humidity or water leaks.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Caution

When moving the machine, turn the power off and

disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at

least two people.

► The machine could fall, causing human injury or

machine damage.

Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight

location, such as a closet.

► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.

Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.

► The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine

damage.

Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical

outlet.

► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.

The machine should be connected to

the power level which is specified on the label.

► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are

using, contact the electrical utility company.

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.

► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric

shock or fire.

Use only No.26 AWGa

a. AWG: American Wire Gauge

or larger, telephone line cord, if

necessary.

► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.

Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe

operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters

(79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG

or larger.

► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could

result in electric shock or fire.

Maintenance / Checking

Caution

Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the

machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do

not spray water directly into the machine.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

Keep cleaning supplies away from children.

► Children may get hurt.

When you are working inside the machine replacing

supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the

machine.

► You may get injured.

Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by

yourself.

► It can cause damage to the machine. Call a

certified technician when the machine needs repair.

Safety information_ 4

Supply usage

Caution

Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.

► Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.

When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep

them away from children.

► Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.

Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner

cartridge or fuser unit.

► It can cause an explosion or fire.

Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to

the machine.

► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a

service fee will be charged.

When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,

be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.

► Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.

Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean

from dust or water.

► This could result in electric shock or fire.

To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's

guide provided with the machine.

► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.

Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with

screws.

► The machine should only be repaired by Samsung service

technician.

Regulatory information_ 1

regulatory information

This machine is certified with several regulatory statements.

Laser Safety Statement

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and

elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to

laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.

•Wavelenght: 800 nm

•Beam divergence

-Paraller: 11 degrees

-Perpendicular: 35 degrees

•Maximum power or energy output: 12 mW

WARNING

Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,

can damage your eyes.

When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:

Taiwan only

Regulatory information_ 2

Ozone Safety

During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is

advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.

If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.

Mercury Safety

Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws. (U.S.A. only)

Power Saver

This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.

When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.

For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov.

Recycling

Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.

China only

Regulatory information_ 3

Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB

cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or

human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to

promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.

Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and

how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.

Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic

accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.

Correct disposal of batteries in this product

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)

This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household

waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium

or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to

human health or the environment.

To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your

local, free battery return system.

Radio Frequency Emissions

FCC Information to the User

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

•This device may not cause harmful interference, and

•This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to

try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

•Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.

Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing

equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la

norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.

Regulatory information_ 4

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15

Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be

present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the

presence of wireless devices.

Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system

label.

The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the

body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.

The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by

the FCC.

This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to

use it. Contact manufacturer for service.

FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:

While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be

exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at

all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.

Taiwan only

Turkey only

Regulatory information_ 5

Russia only

Fax Branding

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any

message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or

on the first page of the transmission the following information:

1. the date and time of transmission

2. identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and

3. telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is

reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can

be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require

modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given

adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service

Ringer Equivalence Number

The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the

machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether

you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving

telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone

line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on

your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may

cause harm to the telephone network.

The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that

contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the

telephone company.

FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s

authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company

should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease

service, providing that they:

a)promptly notify the customer.

b)give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.

c)inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC

Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.

Regulatory information_ 6

You should also know that:

•Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.

•If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and

reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with

your machine.

•If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power

and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.

•When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the

emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency

number.

•This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.

•This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.

Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)

Important

The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the

fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until

you have another fuse cover.

Contact the people from you purchased the machine.

The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal

13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.

If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.

You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.

Important warning:

You must earth this machine.

The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:

•Green and Yellow: Earth

•Blue: Neutral

•Brown: Live

If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:

You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or

green.

You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.

You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.

You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.

Regulatory information_ 7

Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)

Approvals and Certifications

The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable

93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:

Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of:

R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)

The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP)

name to browse the EuDoC.

January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.

January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic

compatibility.

March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of

their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics

Co., Ltd. representative.

EC Certification

Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)

This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched

telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and

compatible PBXs of the European countries:

In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.

The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the

European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional

requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the

relevant advisory notes contained in this document.

European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)

Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be

present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.

Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.

Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified

Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.

The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the

European Commission through the R&TTE directive.

European States qualified under wireless approvals:

EU Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece,

Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain,

Sweden and the U.K.

EEA/EFTA

countries

Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland

European States with restrictions on use:

EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as

wireless

In Italiy, if used outside of own premises, general authorization is required

In Russian, only for indoor applications

EEA/EFTA

countries

No limitations at this time.

Regulatory information_ 8

REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS

Wireless Guidance

Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be

present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.

Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The

wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If

the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices

are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.

The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this

time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety

standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken

to minimize human contact during normal operation.

As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body

(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are

on and transmitting.

This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:

Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require

wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth

communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.

In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless

device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where

use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless

devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.

Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when

traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions

on the use of a wireless device in the destination country.

If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and

shields are in place and the system is fully assembled.

Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to

use it. Contact manufacturer for service.

Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact

manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.

OpenSSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes

software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)."

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)".

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

Regulatory information_ 9

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with

Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to

all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this

distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's,

and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given

attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation

(online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

being used are not cryptographic related.

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an

acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)".

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN

NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply

be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.

Regulatory information_ 10

China only

About this user’s guide_ 1

about this user’s guide

This user’s guide provides information about how to use the machine. Both novice and professional users can refer to this

as a guide for installing and using the machine.

•Read the safety information before using the machine.

•If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 1).

•Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 1).

•All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.

•The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.

Convention

Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:

•Document is synonymous with original.

•Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.

•Machine refers to printer or MFP.

The following table offers the conventions of this guide:

Convention Description Example

Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Start

Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function

and feature.

The date format may differ from country

to country.

Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical

damage or malfunction.

Do not touch the green surface of the

toner cartridge.

Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute

(“Cross-reference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information. (See Finding more information)

About this user’s guide_ 2

Finding more information

You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.

Material name Description

Quick Install Guide This guide provides basic information on setting up your machine.

User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining

your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies.

Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help" on

page 3).

Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,

www.samsung.com/printer.

Downloadable

software

You can download useful software from the Samsung website.

•SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously.

This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com)

•Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)

•Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager)

•XPS printer driver: used to print documents in XPS print path. XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista or higher.

•(http://www.samsung.com/printer)

Features of your new product_ 1

features of your new product

Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.

Special Features

Print with excellent quality and speed

•You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta,

yellow, and black.

•You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi

effective output.

•CLX-6220 Series prints up to 20 ppm, A4-sized paper or up

to 21 ppm, letter sized paper.

•CLX-6250 Series prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper or up

to 25 ppm, letter sized paper.

Handle many different types of printable material

•The multi-purpose tray supports envelopes, labels,

custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper.

•The tray 1 and optional tray support plain paper in various

sizes (See "Print media specifications" on page 3).

Create professional documents (Windows only)

•Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with

words, such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on

page 5).

•Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your

document are magnified and printed across the sheet of

paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See

"Printing posters" on page 3).

•You can use preprinted forms with plain paper (See"Using

overlay (PCL driver only)" on page 5).

Save time and money

•To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single

sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of

paper" on page 3).

•This machine automatically conserves electricity by

substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.

•To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper

(double-sided printing) (See "Printing on both sides of paper"

on page 4).

Expand your machine’s capacity

•Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand the

memory (See "Available accessories" on page 2).

•Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3 (PS)

enables PS printing.

* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3:

©Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.

Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are trademarks

of Zoran Corporation.

136 PS3 fonts: Contains UFST and MicroType from

Monotype Imaging Inc.

Print in various environments

•You can print with various operating system such as

Windows, Linux, Macintosh and UNIX systems (See

"System requirements" on page 2).

•Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a

network interface.

Copy originals in several formats

•Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the

original document on a single page (See "2-up or 4-up

copying (N-up)" on page 3).

•The print quality and image size may be adjusted and

enhance at the same time.

Scan the originals and send it right away

•Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,

TIFF and PDF formats.

•Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using

Networks scanning (See "Sending a scanned image to

several destinations as an email attachment" on page 2).

Set a specific time to transmit a Fax

•You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also

send the fax to several stored destinations.

•After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax

reports according to the setting.

Use USB flash memory devices

If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various

ways with your machine.

•You can scan documents and save them to the device.

•You can directly print data stored to the device.

Features of your new product_ 2

IPv6

This machine supports IPv6.

Features by Models

The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business.

Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries.

Features by models include:

FEATURES CLX-6220 Series CLX-6250 Series

USB 2.0 ● ●

USB Memory Interface ● ●

Document Feeder ● ●

Hard Disk ○

Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● ●

Network Interface 802.11 b/g wireless LANa

a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer

where you bought your printer.

○

Duplex (2-sided) printing ● ●

FAX ● ●

Optional Tray 2 ○ ○

( ●: Included, ○: Optional, Blank: Not available)

Introduction_ 1

1.introduction

This chapter gives you an overview of your machine:

This chapter includes:

•Machine overview

•Control panel overview

•Understanding the Status LED

•Introducing the useful buttons

Machine overview

Front view

1Document feeder cover

12 Front door

2Document feeder width

guides

13 Document output tray

3Document feeder input tray

14 Control panel

4Document feeder output tray

15 Multi-purpose tray paper

width guides

5USB memory port

16 Toner cartridges

6Front door handle

17 Paper transfer belt

7Multi-purpose tray handle

18 Scanner lid

8Paper level indicator

19 Scanner lock switch

9Optional tray 2a

a.Optional device.

20 Scanner glass

10 Tray 1

21 Scan unit

11 Multi-purpose tray

22 Inner cover of the reverse

unit.

Introduction_ 2

Rear view

1Control board cover

7Extension telephone socket

(EXT)

2Rear door

8Telephone line socket

3Cable organizer

9Optional tray 2 cable connector

4Power receptacle

10 Network port

5Power-switch

11 USB port

6Handle

12 IEEE 802.11 b/g Wireless LANa

a.Optional device.

Introduction_ 3

Control panel overview

1ID Copy You can copy both sides of an ID Card such as a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 2).

2Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stores on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on your

machine (See "About USB memory device" on page 1).

3Duplex Allows you to print documents on both sides of the paper.

4Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.

5Toner colors Show the status of each toner cartridge.

6Status Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 5).

7Fax Activates fax mode.

8Copy Activates copy mode.

9Scan/Email Activates scan mode.

10 OK Confirms the selection on the screen.

11 Arrow Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.

12 Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (See "Machine status and advanced feature" on page 1).

13 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level.

14 Numeric keypad Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.

15 Address

Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers and email addresses or search for stored fax numbers or email addresses.

16 Redial/Pause In standby mode, redials the last number. Also in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.

17 On Hook Dial Enable you dial a number with the receiver on the hook.

18 Stop/Clear Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or

resume.

19 Power Saver Sends the machine into power saver mode. If you press and hold this button, you can also turn the power on and off (See

"Power Saver button" on page 5).

Introduction_ 4

20 Start Starts a job in black or color mode.

Introduction_ 5

Understanding the Status LED

The color of the Status indicates the machine's current status.

Status Description

Off •The machine is off-line.

Green Blinking •When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine

is receiving data from the computer.

•When the backlight blinks rapidly, the

machine is printing data.

On The machine is on-line and can be used.

Red Blinking •A minor error has occurred and the machine is

waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the

display message. When the problem is

cleared, the machine resumes.

•A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.

The estimated cartridge lifea

a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner

cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is

designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be

affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media

type and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge

even when Replace new [ccc] toner appears and the printer stops

printing.

of toner is close.

Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You

may temporarily increase the printing quality

by redistributing the toner (See "Replacing the

toner cartridge" on page 2, "Redistributing

toner" on page 1).

On •A toner cartridge has almost reached its

estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to

replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing

the toner cartridge" on page 2).

•A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing

paper jams" on page 3).

•The cover is opened. Close the cover.

•There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in

the tray.

•The machine has stopped due to a major

error. Check the display message (See

"Understanding display messages" on

page 8).

Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner

cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung

cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality.

Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung

toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.

•All printing errors will be appear in the Smart Panel program window.

If the problem persists, call for service.

•Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in

the message or refer to troubleshooting part (See "Understanding

display messages" on page 8). If the problem persists, call for

service.

Introducing the useful buttons

Menu button

When you want to know the machine status and set your machine to use an

advanced feature, click Menu button (See "Machine status and advanced

feature" on page 1).

Stop/Clear button

By pressing the , you can:

Function Description

Cancel print job Press during printing.

Power Saver button

When the machine is not in use, save electricity by pressing the Power

Saver button. Pressing this button for one second puts the machine into

power save mode (See "Using the power saving mode" on page 3).

If you press this button for more than three seconds, a pop-up appears,

asking if you want to turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is

turned off. This button must then be used to turn the button on.

Status Description

Off The machine is not in the power save mode.

Blue On The machine is in the power save mode.

In the following cases, the machine wakes up from the power save

mode.

•Data is received.

•Front door or scan unit is opened.

•Control panel key is pressed.

•Power-switch turn the power on and off.

Getting started_ 1

1.getting started

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.

This chapter includes:

•Setting up the hardware

•Printing a demo page

•Supplied software

•System requirements

•Installing USB connected machine’s driver

•Sharing your machine locally

Setting up the hardware

This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the

Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and

follow the steps below:

1. Select a stable location.

Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow

extra space to open covers and trays.

The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or

sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the

edge of your desk or table.

Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the

altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on

page 1).

Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline

greater than 2 cm (0.79 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be

affected.

2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

3. Remove all the tapes.

4. Install the toner cartridges.

5. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 3).

6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.

7. Turn the machine on.

This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.

Printing a demo page

Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly.

To print a demo page:

In ready mode, press and hold the OK for about 3 seconds, then release.

Supplied software

After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you

must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS,

install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user or

UNIX OS user, download the software from the Samsung website

(www.samsung.com/printer) and install.

Machine software are occasionally updated due to release of new

operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest version from

the Samsung website. (www.samsung.com/printer)

OS Contents

Windows •Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of

your machine’s features.

•PostScript Printer Driver: Use the PostScript driver to

print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS

language. (PostScript printer description file is included.)

•Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition

(WIA) drivers are available for scanning documents on

your machine.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the

machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

•SmarThru Officea:

a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful

image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another

image editor program, such as Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru Office.

For details, refer to the on screen help supplied on the SmarThru Office

program (See "Smarthru Office" on page 3).

This program is the accompanying

Windows-based software for your multifunctional machine.

•Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out

about scan and fax manager program information and

installed scan driver's condition.

•Samsung Network PC Fax: You can find out about fax

manager program information. You can send a fax from

your computer without going to the machine.

•Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set

up printer’s other options from your computer desktop.

•Direct Printing Utility (CLX-6250 Series only): This

program allows you to print PDF files directly.

•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP

addresses.

Macintosh •PostScript Printer Driver: Use this driver to run your

machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents.

(PostScript printer description file is included.)

•Scanner driver: TWAIN driver and Image Capture driver

are available for scanning documents on your machine.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the

machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

•Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out

about scan and fax manager program information and

installed scan driver's condition.

•Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set

up printer’s other options from your computer desktop.

•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP

addresses.

Linux •Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full

advantage of your machine’s features.

•PostScript Printer Driver: Use this driver to run your

machine from a Linux computer and print documents.

(PostScript printer description file is included.)

•SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the

machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

•Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set

up printer’s other options from your computer desktop.

•SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP

addresses.

UNIX •UNIX Printer Driver: Use this driver to print documents

from the UNIX system.

Getting started_ 2

System requirements

Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following

requirements:

Microsoft® Windows®

Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.

OPERATING

SYSTEM

Requirement (recommended)

CPU RAM free HDD

space

Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400

MHz (Pentium III 933

MHz)

64 MB

(128 MB)

600 MB

Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933

MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(256 MB)

1.5 GB

Windows

Server® 2003

Intel® Pentium® III 933

MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(512 MB)

1.25 GB to

2 GB

Windows

Server® 2008

Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz

(Pentium IV 2 GHz)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

Windows

Vista®

Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB

(1024 MB)

15 GB

Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz

32-bit or 64-bit processor

or higher

1 GB (2

GB)

16 GB

•Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory

(to enable the Aero theme).

•DVD-R/W Drive

Windows

Server® 2008

R2

Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz

(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64)

processors (2 GHz or

faster)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

•Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all

Windows operating systems.

•Administrator rights are required to install the software.

•Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine.

Getting started_ 3

Macintosh

OPERATING

SYSTEM

Requirements (recommended)

CPU RAM free HDD

space

Mac OS X

10.3 ~ 10.4

•Intel

Processors

•PowerPC G4/

G5

•128 MB for a

PowerPC based

Mac (512 MB)

•512 MB for a

Intel-based Mac

(1 GB)

1 GB

Mac OS X

10.5

•Intel

Processors

•867 MHz or

faster Power

PC G4/ G5

512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB

Mac OS X

10.6

•Intel

Processors

1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB

Linux

Item Requirement (recommended)

Operating

system

RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)

Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit)

SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit)

OpenSuSE® 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0,

11.1 (32/64 bit)

Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)

Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit)

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit)

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)

Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)

CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2)

RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)

Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)

•It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working

with large scanned images.

•The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum.

UNIX

Item Requirements

Operating

system

Sun Solaris / SPARC

Sun Solaris / x86

HP-UX / PA-RISC

HP-UX / Itanium

IBM AIX / Power

Free HDD space Up to 100 MB

Installing USB connected machine’s driver

A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your

computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network,

skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected

machine’s driver (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on

page 3).

Only use an USB cable no longer then 3 m (10 ft. ).

Windows

You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.

The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a

machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for

machine operations will be installed.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the

installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and

Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run

program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account

Control windows.

3. Select Install now.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

•For CLX-6250 Series installation window, you can see Wireless

Setting and Installation menu. You can use this menu if an

optional wireless network card is installed and/or the machine

is connected to your computer with a USB cable.

Install the optional wireless network card. Instructions for

Wireless Setting and Installation, refer to the wireless

network installation guide provided with the optional wireless

network card.

•The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom

Getting started_ 4

Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom

Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and

choose individual components to install. The Install Software

Only allows you to install the supplied software, such as Smart

Panel. Follow the instruction in the window.

•Administrator Installation provides convenient installation

methods useful for administrators (See "Administrator’s Guide

(Windows only)" on page 1).

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

The program searches the machine.

If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following

window will appear.

•Check if you want to install the software without connecting

the printer to the network or locally.

-Check this option to install this program without a machine

connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be

skipped, and completes the installation.

•Search again

When you press this button, the firewall notice window

appears;

-Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating

system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall,

and inactivate this option. For other operating systems,

refer to their guide.

-Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the

operating system. Refer to the manual provided by

individual programs.

•Direct Input

The Direct Input allows you to search for a specific machine

on the newtwork.

-Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host

name. Then click Next.

To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network

configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on

page 1).

-Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC

Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared

printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.

•Help

If your machine is not connected to the computer or network,

This help button gives detailed information about the how to

connect the machine.

5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you

want to use and click Next.

When the driver finds only one machine, the confirmation window

appears.

6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page

appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.

Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.

7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.

If not, click No to reprint it.

8. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from

Samsung, click On-line Registration.

9. Click Finish.

If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to

repair or reinstall the driver.

a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >

Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance.

c)Select the option you want, follow the instruction on the window.

Macintosh

The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD

file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only

available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for

printing on a Macintosh computer.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.

4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.

6. Enter the password and click OK.

7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.

9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.

10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for

most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be

installed.

If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to

Getting started_ 5

install.

11. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your

computer appears, click Continue.

12. Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK.

If you select Typical installation for a network printer during the

machine driver installation, the SetIP program automatically runs.

If the machine has already configured network infomation, close

the SetIP program. Go to the next step.

13. After the installation is finished, click Quit.

14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System

Preferences and click Print & Fax.

15. Click Add on the Printer List.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop

up.

16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.

•For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB

connection.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.

17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.

•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.

Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default

machine.

18. Click Add.

If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and

reinstall it.

Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.

a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.

d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon.

f)Enter the password and click OK.

g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

h)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.

i)When the message which warns that all applications will close on

your computer appears, Click Continue.

j)When the uninstall is done, click Quit.

Linux

You need to download the Linux software package from the Samsung

website to install the printer software.

Follow the steps below to install the software.

Installing the Linux Unified Driver

1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the

Login field and enter the system password.

You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine

software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

3.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver

package to your computer.

4.Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.

5.Double click cdroot > autorun.

6.When the welcome screen appears, click Next.

7.When the installation is complete, click Finish.

The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator

desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your

convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that

is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from

the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver

Configurator or Image Manager.

Installing the SmartPanel

1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the

Login field and enter the system password.

You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine

software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

3.From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to

your computer.

4.Right click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.

5.Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.

Installing the Printer Setting Utility

1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the

Login field and enter the system password.

You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine

software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

3.From the Samsung website, download the Printer Setting Utility

package to your computer.

4.Right click the Printer Setting Utility package and extract the

package.

5.Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.

If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and

reinstall it again.

Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux.

Getting started_ 6

a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

b)When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root”

in the Login field and enter the system password.

You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer

driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

c)Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal

screen appears, type in:

[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/

[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh

d)Click Uninstall.

e)Click Next.

f)Click Finish.

Sharing your machine locally

Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine

locally.

If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable

and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer

connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the

host computer to print.

1Host computer A computer which is directly connected to

the machine by USB cable.

2Client computers Computers which use the machine shared

through the host computer.

Windows

Setting up a host computer

1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s

driver" on page 3, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on

page 3).

2.Click the Windows Start menu.

3.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and

Sound > Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

4.Right click your printer icon.

5.For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,

select the Printer properties.

If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

6.Select the Sharing tab.

7.Check the Change Sharing Options.

8.Check the Share this printer.

9.Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.

Setting up a client computer

1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s

driver" on page 3).

2.Click the Windows Start menu.

3.Select All programs > Accessories > Window Explorer.

4.Enter in the IP address of the host computer and press Enter.

In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill

in User ID and password of the host computer account.

5.Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.

6.When the set up complete message appears, click OK.

7.Open the file you want to print and start printing.

Macintosh

The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help

for other OS versions.

Setting up a host computer

1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 4, "Macintosh" on

page 5).

2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print

& Fax.

3.Select the printer to share in the Printer List.

4.Select Share this printer.

Setting up a client computer

1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s

driver" on page 3).

2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print

& Fax.

3.Press the “+” icon.

A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.

4.Select your machine and click Add.

Network setup_ 1

1.network setup

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.

This chapter includes:

•Network environment

•Introducing useful network programs

•Using a wired network

•Installing network connected machine’s driver

•IPv6 Configuration

Network environment

You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your

network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the

machine's control panel.

The following table shows the network environments supported by the

machine:

Item Requirements

Network interface •Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX

•802.11 b/g Wireless LAN (Optional)

Network operating system •Windows

2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/2008

Server R2

•Various Linux OS

•Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6

•UNIX

Network protocols •TCP/IPv4

•DHCP, BOOTP

•DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP

•Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR,

IPP, WSD

•SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), Telnet, SMTP

(S), LDAP (S), IPSec

•SMB, FTP, Kerberos

•TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR,

SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), IPSec)

(See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 6.)

Wireless security

(Optional)

•Authentication: Open System, Shared

Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal

(PSK)

•Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP,

AES

Introducing useful network programs

There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in

network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing

several machines on the network is possible.

Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.

SyncThru™ Web Service

Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to:

•Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect

to various network environments.

•Customize machine settings.

(See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 1.)

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service

A web-based machine management solution for network administrators.

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of

managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot

network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download

this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.

SetIP

This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually

configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol (See "IPv4

setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 2 , "IPv4 setting using

SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 2 or "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program

(Linux)" on page 3).

TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.

Using a wired network

You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your

network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished.

You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding

port on your machine.

Printing configuration report

You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control

panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help

you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Report and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network Info. and press OK.

Network setup_ 2

5. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm printing.

The Network Configuration Report prints.

Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC

address and IP address.

For example:

•MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78

•IP Address : 192.0.0.192

Setting IPv4 address

You must set up an IPv4 address for network printing and management. In

most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.

If you use IPv6 address, refer to "IPv6 Configuration" on page 6

In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a

static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.

•DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a

few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the

machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained

above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the

assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the

report.

•Static IP assignment: Use the SetIP program to change the IP address

from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also

change the IP address using the machine's control panel.

In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network

administrator to set this address for you.

IPv4 setting using control panel

1.Connect your machine to the network with an network cable.

2.Turn on the machine.

3.Press Menu on the control panel.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight TCP/IP (IPv4) and press OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Static and press OK.

7.Press the up/down arrow to highlight IP Address and press OK.

8.Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK.

9.Enter other parameters, such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway and

press OK.

10.After entering all parameters, press Stop/Clear to return to ready

mode.

Now go to "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 3.

IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)

This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your

machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A

MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and

can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing

by performing the following:

1.Open Control Panel.

2.Double click Security Center.

3.Click Windows Firewall.

4.Disable the firewall.

Installing the program

1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.

When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.

2.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive. (X

represents your CD-ROM drive.)

3.Double-click Application > SetIP.

4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.

5.Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.

Starting the program

1.Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.

2.Turn on the machine.

3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung

Printers > SetIP > SetIP.

4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the

TCP/IP configuration window.

5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as

follows:

•MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address on the Network

Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For

example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.

A MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s

network interface and can be found in the Network

Configuration Report.

•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.

For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,

enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than

the computer’s address.)

•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.

•Default Gateway: Enter a new Gateway for your machine.

6.Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print

the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all of the settings

are correct.

7.Click Exit to close the SetIP program.

8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.

IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)

For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing

by performing the following:

The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac

OS manul to turn firewall off.

1.Open System Preferences.

2.Click Security.

Network setup_ 3

3.Click the Firewall menu.

4.Turn the firewall off.

The following instructions may vary for your model.

Perform the following to configure the IP address:

1.Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.

2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window. Open the

MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html.

3.Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select

Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows

the printer’s name and IP address information.

4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the

TCP/IP configuration window.

5.Enter the printer’s new information into the configuration window as

follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this

information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.

•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network

Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For

example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.

The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the

on-board network interface and can be found on the

Network Configuration Report.

•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.

For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,

enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than

the computer’s address.)

•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.

•Default Gateway: Enter a new Gateway for your machine.

6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically

print the configuration report. Confirm that all of the settings are

correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation

CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have

successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.

IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)

The SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer

driver installation.

The path and UIs may differ by Linux OS version. Refer to the

Linux OS manual to turn firewall off.

1.Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s

MAC address.

2.Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.

3.Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.

4.Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.

5.Enter the MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,

and then click Apply.

When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).

6.The machine prints the network information. Confirm all of the settings

are correct.

7.Close the SetIP program.

Network parameter setting

You can also set up the various network settings through the network

administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and

SyncThru™ Web Service.

Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™

Web Service

1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and

enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.

For example,

2.Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

3.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service

website.

A log-in page appears.

4.Type in the ID and Password then click Login .

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

5.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >

Network Settings > Restore Default.

6.Click Clear for network.

7.Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.

Installing network connected machine’s driver

You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software

includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.

Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All

applications should be closed on your computer before beginning

installation.

Windows

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for

machine operations will be installed.

Follow the steps below:

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered

on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appear.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2,

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and

Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run

program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account

Control windows.

Network setup_ 4

3. Select Install now.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

•For CLX-6250 Series installation window, you can see Wireless

Setting and Installation menu. You can use this menu if an

optional wireless network card is installed and/or the machine

is connected to your computer with a USB cable.

Install the optional wireless network card. Instructions for

Wireless Setting and Installation, refer to the wireless

network installation guide provided with the optional wireless

network card.

•The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom

Installation and Install Software Only. Custom Installation

allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose

individual component to install. Install Software Only allows

you to install the supplied software, such as Smart Panel.

Follow the guide in the window.

•Administrator Installation provides convenient installation

methods useful for administrators (See "Administrator’s Guide

(Windows only)" on page 1).

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

The program searches for the machine.

If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following

window will appear.

•Check if you want to install the software without connecting

the printer to the network or locally.

-Check this option to install this program without a machine

connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be

skipped, and completes the installation.

•Search again

When you press this button, the firewall notice window

appears;

-Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating

system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall,

and inactivate this option. For other operating systems,

refer to their on-line guides.

-Turn off all firewall from the third party's program beside the

operating system. Refer to the manual provided by

individual programs.

•Direct Input

The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on

the network.

-Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host

name. Then click Next.

To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network

configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on

page 1).

-Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC

Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared

printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.

•Help

If your machine is not connected to the computer or network,

This help button gives detailed information about the how to

connect the machine.

5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you

wish to use and click Next.

If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window

appears.

6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page

appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.

Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.

7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.

If not, click No to reprint it.

8. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from

Samsung, click On-line Registration.

Network setup_ 5

9. Click Finish.

•After the driver setup, you may enable firewall.

•If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to

repair or reinstall the driver.

a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and

powered on.

b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >

Samsung Printers > your printer driver name >

Maintenance.

c)Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the

window.

Macintosh

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered

on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.

4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.

6. Enter the password and click OK.

7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.

9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.

10. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

11. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for

most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be

installed.

•If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to

install.

12. The message which warns that all applications will close on your

computer appears. Click Continue.

If you select Typical installation for a network printer during the

machine driver installation, the SetIP program automatically runs.

If the machine has already configured network information, close

the SetIP program. Go to the next step.

13. After the installation is finished, click Quit.

14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System

Preferences and click Print & Fax.

15. Click Add on the Printer List.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop

up.

16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.

•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.

17. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.

When printing a document containing many pages, printing

performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer

Type option.

18. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.

19. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine

the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue

first.

20. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.

•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.

Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default

machine.

21. Click Add.

If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and

reinstall it.

Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.

a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and

powered on.

b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh

desktop.

d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon.

f)Enter the password and click OK.

g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

h)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.

i)When the message which warns that all applications will close on

your computer appears, Click Continue.

j)When the uninstall is done, click Quit.

Linux

Install Linux Driver

1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and

powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.

2.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver

package to your computer.

3.Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.

4.Double click cdroot > autorun.

5.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.

6.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.

7.Select Network printer and click Search button.

8.The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.

9.Select your machine and click Next.

10.Input the printer description and Next.

11.When the add printer is done, click Finish.

12.When the install is done, click Finish.

Add network Printer

1.Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.

2.Click Add Printer…

3.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.

4.Select Network printer and click the Search button.

5.The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.

6.Select your machine and click Next.

7.Input the printer description and Next

8.When the add printer is done, click Finish.

UNIX

To use UNIX Printer Driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver

package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX Printer

Driver package from the Samsung website.

Network setup_ 6

Installing the UNIX printer driver package

Installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned

(See "UNIX" on page 3).

1.From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer

Driver package to your computer.

2.Acquire root privileges.

su -

3.Copy appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.

See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.

4.Unpack the UNIX printer driver package archive.

For example, on IBM AIX use the following commands.

cd /tmp

gzip –dc /cdrom/unix/packages/aix_power/aix_power.tar.gz | tar

–xvf –

The “binaries” folder consists of binz, install, share files and folders

5.Copy the “binaries” folder to any local folder.

6.Change to the driver’s “binaries” directory.

cd aix_power/binaries

7.Run the install script.

./install

install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the

UNIX Printer Driver package.

Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the

installer script.

8.Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify install results.

9.Run ‘installprinter’ from the command line. This will bring up the Add

Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring the

procedure next.

On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10 just added

printer may not be enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this

case run the following two commands on the root terminal:

accept <printer_name>

enable <printer_name>

Uninstalling the printer driver package

The uninstalling printer utility should be used to delete the printer

installed in the system.

a)Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.

It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard

The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list

b)Select the printer to be deleted.

c)Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.

d)Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole

package.

e)To verify uninstall results, execute the “. /install –c” command.

To reinstall it again, use the command “. /install” to reinstall the binaries.

Setting up the printer

To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the

command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup

the printer in this window according to the following steps:

1.Type the name of the printer.

2.Select appropriate printer model from model list.

3.Enter any decsription corresponding to the type of the printer in the

Type field. This is optional.

4.Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is

optional.

5.Specify printer location in the Location field.

6.Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox

for network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue

type only DNS name is possible, numeric IP address is not allowed.

7.Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the

corresponding list box. Additionally usb type is available on Sun

Solaris OS.

8.Select Copies to set the number of copies.

9.Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.

10.Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse

order.

11.Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.

12.Click OK to add the printer.

IPv6 Configuration

TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.

If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting

to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default

settings using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 3).

To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the

IPv6 address:

1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.

2. Turn on the machine.

3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control

panel that will check IPv6 addresses.

a)Press Menu on the control panel.

b)Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

c)Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network Info. and press

OK.

4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add

Printer.

5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.

6. Follow the instruction on the window.

If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate

IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.

Activating IPv6

1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.

2. Turned on the machine.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

5. Press up/down arrow to highlight TCP/IP (IPv6) and press OK.

6. Press up/down arrow to highlight IPv6 Activate and press OK.

7. Press up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

On is set as a default.

8. Turn the machine off and turn it on again.

9. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control

panel that will check IPv6 addresses.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

3.Press up/down arrow to highlight Network Info. and press OK.

Network setup_ 7

Setting IPv6 addresses

Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and

managements.

•Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts

with FE80.)

•Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a

network router.

•Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.

•Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.

DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)

If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the

following option for default dynamic host configuration:

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

3.Press up/down arrow to highlight TCP/IP (IPv6) and press OK.

4.Press up/down arrow to highlight DHCPv6 Config and press OK.

5.Press up/down arrow to access the required value.

•Routers: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.

•DHCPv6 Addresses: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router

request.

•DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.

6.Press OK.

Manual address configuration

1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6

addressing as a URL (See "Connecting SyncThru™ Web Service"

on page 7).

For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the

address field and press the Enter key or click Go.

2.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service

website.

A log-in page appears.

3.Type in the ID and Password then click Login .

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

4.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >

Network Settings.

5.Click TCP/IPv6.

6.Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section.

IPv6 Protocol should enable.

7.Select the Address / Prefix and click the Add button, then the router

prefix will automatically be entered into the address field.

Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the

hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.)

8.Click the Apply button.

Installing printer driver

Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same

as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on

page 3).

Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply

select your machine's IPv6 address.

Connecting SyncThru™ Web Service

1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6

addressing as a URL .

2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.

A log-in page appears.

4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login .

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

5. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless

Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network

Configuration Report.

6. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701])

Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.

Basic setup_ 1

1.basic setup

After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like

to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.

This chapter includes:

•Altitude adjustment

•Changing the display language

•Setting the date and time

•Changing the clock mode

•Changing the default mode

•Setting sounds

•Entering characters using the number keypad

•Using the power saving mode

•Setting job timeout

•Auto continue

•Paper substitution

•Net accounting

•Setting the color report

•Setting the default tray and paper

•Changing the font setting

Altitude adjustment

The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined

by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will

guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality

of print.

Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.

0

1High 3

2High 2

3High 1

4Normal

In the control panel

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Altitude Adjust and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the setting option you want appears.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

In the computer

1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or

Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status

bar in Mac OS X (See "Understanding Smart Panel" on page 2).

Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,

select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer

driver name > Smart Panel.

2. Click Printer Setting.

3. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value from

the dropdown list, and then click Apply.

If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service

screen appears automatically. Click Settings > Machine Settings >

System > Setup > Altitude Ad.. Select the appropriate altitude value,

and then click Apply.

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

Changing the display language

To change the language that appears on the display, follow the steps below:

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Language and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to display the language you want.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the date and time

When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print.

They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to

correct it to the present date and time.

If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time

and date once the power has been restored.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Date & Time and press OK.

5. Enter the correct time and date using up/down, left/right arrow or

numeric keypad.

Month = 01 to 12,

Day = 01 to 31,

Year = requires four digits,

Hour = 01 to 12,

Minute = 00 to 59

Basic setup_ 2

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Changing the clock mode

You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour

or 24-hour format.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clock Mode and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the other mode and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Changing the default mode

Your machine is preset to Copy mode. You can switch this default mode

between Fax mode and Copy mode.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Default Mode and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the mode you want.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting sounds

You can control the following sounds:

•Key Sound: Turns the key sound On or Off. With this option set to On,

a tone sounds each time a key is pressed.

•Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound On or Off. With this option set to

On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication

ends.

•Speaker: Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through

the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to

Comm. which means “Comm.”, the speaker is on until the remote

machine answers.

You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial.

•Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can

select Off, Low, Mid, and High.

Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Sound/Volume and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the sound option you want highlights and

press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound

you have selected highlights and press OK.

6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Speaker volume

To adjust the volume using On Hook Dial:

1. Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the earpiece.

2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.

3. Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode.

Entering characters using the number keypad

As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.

For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your

company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or

email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.

Entering alphanumeric characters

1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled with

the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter appears

on the display.

For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.

Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m,

n, o and finally 6.

You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign, and etc. For

details, see the below section.

2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.

If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by

pressing the left/right arrow button and then press the button labeled

with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and the next

letter will appear on the display.

You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.

3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.

Keypad letters and numbers

Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job

you are doing.

Key Assigned numbers, letters, or characters

1@ / . ‘ 1

2A B C a b c 2

3D E F d e f 3

4G H I g h i 4

5J K L j k l 5

6M N O m n o 6

7P Q R S p q r s 7

8T U V t u v 8

9W X Y Z w x y z 9

0& + - , 0_

* *

% ^ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ] (These symbols are available when you type

for network authentication.)

# #

= | ? " : { } < > ; (These symbols are available when you type for

network authentication.)

Basic setup_ 3

Correcting numbers or names

If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left/right

arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct

number or character.

Inserting a pause

With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for

example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must insert a

pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while you are

setting up speed dial numbers.

To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while

entering the telephone number. A dash(-) appears on the display at the

corresponding location.

Using the power saving mode

When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save

power.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Power Save and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the time you want.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting job timeout

When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the

current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the amount of

time the machine will wait.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Timeout and press OK.

5. Enter the time using up/down arrow or numeric keypad.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Auto continue

This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not, in case that

the paper size you have set and the paper in the tray mismatches.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Auto Continue and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the setting option you want appears.

•On: Automatically prints after set time passes, when the paper size

mismatches the tray paper size.

•Off: Waits until you press Start on the control panel, when the paper

size mismatches the tray paper size.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Paper substitution

This option is to prevent the paper mismatch between tray and the printer

driver. For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper

size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine prints on A4 paper and vice

versa.

This option only works for mismatch between A4 and Letter paper.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Substitution and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Net accounting

This is the option limits the number of use for fax, printer, copy and scan.

First, the administrator needs to install the Job account Plug-in from

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service. Then, create user accounts by entering

user ID and Password in SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.

If you are not registered, request Administrator for a registration.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Net Accounting and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the setting option you want appears.

•Protect: Select the option for which you want to enable or disable net

accounting.

•Change Password: The access password code can be changed.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the color report

This menu allows you to print reports in color.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Color Report and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the default tray and paper

You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing

job.

Wide A4 is useful when printing in DOS mode. This option prints 80

charactors in a line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in

DOS mode.

In the control panel

Setting the paper size

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

Basic setup_ 4

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press

OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow to select the paper size you want.

7.Press OK to save the selection.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the paper type

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press

OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow to select the paper type you want.

7.Press OK to save the selection.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the paper source

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and

press OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want.

7.Press OK to save the selection.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

In the computer

Windows

1.Click the Windows Start menu.

2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and

Sound > Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

3.Right-click your machine.

4.For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,

select the Printing Preferences.

If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

5.Click Paper tab.

6.Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.

7.Press OK.

If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper,

select Paper tab > Size > Edit... in the Printing Preferences (See

"Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

Macintosh

Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to

change the default setting manually each time they want to print using

other settings.

1.Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.

2.Open the File menu and click Print.

3.Go to Paper Feed pane.

4.Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.

5.Go to Paper pane.

6.Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from

which you want to print.

7.Click Print to print.

Linux

1.Open Terminal Program

2.When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following:

[root@localhost root]# lpr [FileName]

3.Select Printer and click Properties…

4.Click Advanced tab.

5.Select tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type.

6.Press OK.

Changing the font setting

Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.

If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as

the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:

1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or

Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status

bar in Mac OS X.

Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,

select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer

driver name > Smart Panel.

2. Click Printer Setting.

3. Click Emulation.

4. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting.

5. Click Apply.

Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding

languages.

•Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic

•Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)

•Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek

•Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,

Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic

•OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B

Media and tray_ 1

1.media and tray

This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.

This chapter includes:

•Preparing originals

•Loading originals

•Selecting print media

•Changing the tray size

•Loading paper in the tray

•Printing on special media

•Setting the paper size and type

•Selecting an output location

Preparing originals

•Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or

larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).

•Do not attempt to load the following types of paper, in order to prevent

paper jam, low print quality and machine damage.

-Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper

-Coated paper

-Onion skin or thin paper

-Wrinkled or creased paper

-Curled or rolled paper

-Torn paper

-Used paper (Something previously printed on side one)

•Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.

•Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely

dry before loading.

•Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.

•Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with

other unusual characteristics.

Loading originals

You can use the scanner glass or the automatic document feeder to load an

original for copying, scanning and sending a fax.

On the scanner glass

Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original is

detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over the

original on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for

colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.

1. Lift and open the scanner lid.

2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. And align it with the

registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.

3. Close the scanner lid.

•Leaving the scanner lid open while copying will create a black

copy, and consume a great deal of toner.

•Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.

Always keep it clean (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 3).

•If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the

scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then

close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,

start copying with the lid open.

Media and tray_ 2

•Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.

•Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid

may fall on your hands and get hurt.

•Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or

scanning. It is harmful to eyes.

In the document feeder

Using the document feeder, you can load up to 40 sheets of paper (80 g/m2,

20 lb bond) for one job.

1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before

loading originals.

2. Load the original face up into the document feeder. Make sure that the

bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the

document input tray.

3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.

Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the

printout. Always keep the glass clean (See "Cleaning the scan

unit" on page 3).

Selecting print media

You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,

labels. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your

machine.

Guidelines to select the print media

Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide

may cause the following problems:

•Poor print quality

•Increased paper jams

•Premature wear on the machine.

Properties, such as weight, composition, grain and moisture content, are

important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output

quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:

•The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are

described in print media specifications (See "Print media specifications"

on page 3).

•Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for

your project.

•Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce

sharper, more vibrant images.

•Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how

crisp the printing looks on the paper.

•Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and

still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of

improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,

or other variables over which cannot be controlled.

•Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it

meets the requirements specifications in this user’s guide and

meets your output requirements.

Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause

problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the

warranty or service agreements.

The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type

used (See "Print media specifications" on page 3).

Media sizes supported in each mode

Mode Size Source

Copy mode Letter, A4, Legal,

Oficio, Folio,

Executive, ISO B5, JIS

B5, A5, A6

•Tray 1

•Optional tray 2

•Multi-purpose tray

Print mode All sizes supported by

the machine.

•Tray 1

•Optional tray 2

•Multi-purpose tray

Fax mode Letter, A4, Legal •Tray 1

•Optional tray 2

Duplex printinga

a.75 to 105 g/m2 (20~28 lb bond) only

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,

Oficio

•Tray 1

•Optional tray 2

•Multi-purpose tray

Media and tray_ 3

Changing the tray size

The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To

change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.

1Tray extend lever

2Paper length guide

3Paper width guide

1. Hold the tray with one hand, and with the other hand squeeze and slide

the paper length guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot

marked at the bottom of the tray.

2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before

loading papers.

3. After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and

paper length guide. Then slide them to the desired paper size marked at

the bottom of the tray.

1Paper length guide

2Paper width guide

•Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to

warp.

•If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper

jams.

Loading paper in the tray

Tray 1/optional tray 2

Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into tray 1.

Tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of plain paper.

You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to

load an additional 500 sheets of plain paper (See "Available accessories"

on page 2).

Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,

requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or

service agreements.

1. Pull out tray. And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading

(See "Changing the tray size" on page 3).

2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before

loading papers.

3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up.

1Paper limit mark

2Paper level

indicator

Media and tray_ 4

Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.

1Full

2Empty

4. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.

For information about setting the paper type and size on the control

panel (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 7).

•If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the

paper meets the media specification. Then, try placing one

sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray (See "Print media

specifications" on page 3).

•The settings made from the machine driver override the settings

on the control panel.

a)To print in application, open an application and start the print

menu.

b)Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

c)Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an

appropriate paper type.

d)Select tray in paper source, then press OK.

e)Start printing in application.

Multi-purpose tray

The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,

such as postcards, note cards and envelopes. It is useful for single page

printing on colored paper.

Tips on using the multi-purpose tray

•Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the

multi-purpose tray.

•To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is

still paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types

of print media.

•Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print

quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on page 3).

•Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading

them into the multi-purpose tray.

1.Grab the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open.

2.Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before

loading papers.

3.Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.

4.Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to

the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will bent

resulting in a paper jam or skew.

•When printing the special media, you must follow the loading

guideline (See "Printing on special media" on page 5).

•When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper

in manually until it starts feeding automatically.

Media and tray_ 5

5.When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the

multi-purpose tray.

For information about setting the paper type and size on the control

panel (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 7).

The settings made from the machine driver override the

settings on the control panel.

a)To print in application, open an application and start the print

menu.

b)Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

c)Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an

appropriate paper type.

For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type

to Label.

d)Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.

e)Start printing in application.

f)After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.

Printing on special media

The table below shows the available special media for each tray.

When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a

time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray (See

"Print media specifications" on page 3).

Types Tray 1 Optional tray Multi-purpose

tray

Plain ● ● ●

Thick ● ● ●

Thicker ●

Extra Thick ●

Thin ● ● ●

Cotton ● ● ●

Color ● ● ●

Preprinted ● ● ●

Recycled ● ● ●

Envelope ●

Labels ●

CardStock ●

Bond ●

Archive ●

Glossy Photo ●

Matte Photo ●

( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)

The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type

option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This

setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the

best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.

•Plain: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) Normal plain paper.

•Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb) thick paper.

•Thicker: 106 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) thicker paper.

•Extra Thick: 120 to 170 g/m2 (32 to 46 lb) extra thick.

•Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.

•Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper.

•Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.

•Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper.

•Recycled: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) recycled paper.

When you use recycled paper as a used paper, printouts might be

wrinkled and/or jamming may occur due to excessive curl.

•Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.

•Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.

•CardStock: 171 to 220 g/m2 (46 to 59 lb) cardstock.

•Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.

•Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb). If you need to keep the print-out for

a long period time, such as archives, select this option.

•Glossy Photo: 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35lb), 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to

47lb), 176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59lb) glossy photo paper.

•Matte Photo: 111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35lb), 131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47lb),

176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59lb) matte photo paper.

Envelope

Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the

envelopes.

To print an envelope, place it flap side up with the stamp area bottm the top

right side.

•When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:

-Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2

otherwise, jam may occur.

-Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than

6 mm curl, and should not contain air.

-Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either damaged.

-Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and

pressure of the machine during operation.

•Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.

•Do not use stamped envelopes.

•Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,

self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.

•Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.

•Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to

the corner of the envelope.

Media and tray_ 6

1 Acceptable

2 Unacceptable

•Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that

folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s

fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps

and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams and may even

damage the fuser.

•For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from

the edges of the envelope.

•Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.

Labels

To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser

machines.

•When selecting labels, consider the following factors:

-Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s

fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F).

-Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between

them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the

labels, causing serious jams.

-Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of

curl in any direction.

-Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other

indications of separation.

•Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.

Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can

cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to

machine components.

•Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The

adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the

machine.

•Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are

wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.

Card stock/Custom-sized paper

•Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.9 inches) wide or 148 mm

(5.8 inches) long.

•In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)

away from the edges of the material.

Letterhead/Preprinted paper

Single-sided double-sided

Tray1

Optional tray

Face up Face down

Multi-purpose

tray

Face down Face up

•Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that

will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected

to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your

machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C (338

°F).

•Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not

adversely affect machine rollers.

•Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to

prevent changes during storage.

•Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the

paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted

paper, reducing print quality.

Used paper

When loading used paper, printed side should be facing up with an uncurled

edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper

around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.

•Used paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt,

vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the

Media and tray_ 7

machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s

specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F).

•Used paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect

machine rollers.

•Before you load used paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.

During the fusing process, wet ink can come off used paper, reducing

print quality.

Photo

•Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could

cause damage to the machine.

Glossy photo

Load one paper to the multi-purpose tray at a time, glossy side facing

down.

•Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP

Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.

•Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP

Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A).

Matte photo

Load one paper to the multi-purpose tray at a time, side to be printed

facing down.

Setting the paper size and type

After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the

control panel. These settings will apply to copy and fax modes. For

computer printing, select the paper size and type in the application program

you use on your computer (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on

the control panel.

Setting the paper size

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press

OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper size you want.

7. Press OK to save the selection.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

If you want to use special-sized paper-such as a billing paper, select

Custom in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening

printing preferences" on page 2).

Setting the paper type

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press

OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper type you want.

7. Press OK to save the selection.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Setting the paper source

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and press

OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to select the paper tray you want.

7. Press OK to save the selection.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

If you want to use special-sized paper-such as a billing paper, select

Edit.. in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening

printing preferences" on page 2).

Selecting an output location

The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large

number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the

surface, and do not allow children near it.

The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help

the printed pages to align. For the output support to correctly align the

pages, you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size.

1Output support

2Extension

•If paper coming out of the output try has problems, such as excessive

curl, try printing to the rear door.

•If the output support is incorrectly adjusted, printed pages may be

mis-aligned or fall.

Media and tray_ 8

For Letter-sized paper

Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown, and

unfold the extension.

For A4- or Legal-sized paper

Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4, LGL as shown, and

unfold the extension.

Printing_ 1

1.printing

This chapter explains common printing tasks.

This chapter includes:

•Introducing useful software programs

•Printer driver features

•Basic printing

•Opening printing preferences

•Using help

•Using special print features

•Postscript options

•Using direct printing utility (CLX-6250 Series only)

•Changing the default print settings

•Setting your machine as a default machine

•Printing to a file (PRN)

•Using the job accounting option

•Macintosh printing

•Linux printing

•UNIX printing

The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.

Introducing useful software programs

Samsung AnyWeb Print

This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of

Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary

program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung

AnyWeb Print > Download the lastest version to link the website where

the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows

operating systems.

Samsung Easy Color Manager

This program helps users to adjust color as they like. Users can adjust the

printout color as they see them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be

stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts. Download this program

from http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager.

Printer driver features

Your printer drivers support the following standard features:

•Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection

•Number of copies

In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following

table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer

drivers:

Some models or operating system may not support the certain

feature(s) in the following table.

PCL Printer driver

Feature Windows

Machine quality option ●

Booklet printing ●

Poster printing ●

Multiple pages per sheet ●

Fit to page printing ●

Reduce and enlarge printing ●

Different source for first page ●

Watermark ●

Overlay ●

Double-sided printing (duplex) ●

( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)

PostScript Printer driver

Feature Windows Linux Macintosh

Machine quality option ● ● ●

Poster printing ●

Multiple pages per sheet ● ●

(2, 4)

●

Fit to page printing ● ● ●

Reduce and enlarge

printing

● ●

Different source for first

page

● ●

Watermark ●

Overlay ●

Double-sided printing

(duplex)a

a.The machine with duplex feature prints both side of a paper.

● ● ●

( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)

Printing_ 2

Basic printing

Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, Linux

or UNIX applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary

depending on the application you use.

•Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide

may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the

composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check

the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine

(See "System requirements" on page 2).

•When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a

warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you

can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( )

mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s

setting or environment.

The following procedure describes the general steps required for

printing from various Windows applications.

•Macintosh basic printing (See "Macintosh printing" on page 9).

•Linux basic printing (See "Linux printing" on page 10).

•UNIX basic printing (See "UNIX printing" on page 12).

The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP.

Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your

operating system or the application you are using.

1. Open the document you want to print.

2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.

3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.

The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range

are selected within the Print window.

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer

driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print

window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.

•The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality

from PostScript-based applications such as Acrobat Reader®,

Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe Photoshop®, etc.

•If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb

Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing

the image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers >

your machine name > Samsung AnyWeb > Download the

lastest version to link the website where the tool is available for

the download.

Canceling a print job

If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as

follows:

1. Click the Windows Start menu.

2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and

Sound > Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

3. For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and 2008, double-click your

machine.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer

icon > context menus > See what’s printing.

If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.

You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the

machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.

You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear on the

control panel.

Opening printing preferences

You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing

Preferences.

The following windows may differ, depending on your operating

system , printer models or the application you are using.

1. Open the document you want to print.

2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.

3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.

Printing_ 3

4. Click Properties or Preferences.

Using a favorite setting

The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for

Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future

use.

To save a Presets item:

1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.

2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. Click Add.

3. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved.

If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more

options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made.

To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The

machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.

To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click

Delete.

You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default

Preset from the Presets drop down list.

Using help

Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click

on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with

information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver.

If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in

the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of

the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or

registration and so on, click appropriate buttons.

Using special print features

Special print features include:

•"Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 3.

•"Printing posters" on page 3.

•"Printing booklets" on page 4.

•"Printing on both sides of paper" on page 4.

•"Change percentage of your document" on page 4.

•"Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 4.

•"Using watermarks" on page 5.

•"Using overlay (PCL driver only)" on page 5.

•"Job Setting (CLX-6250 Series only)" on page 6.

•"Graphics tab options" on page 6.

•"Enhancing glossiness (Windows only)" on page 7.

Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To

print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and

arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one

sheet.

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type

drop-down list.

3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)

in the Pages per Side drop-down list.

4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.

5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the

sheet.

6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.

7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Printing posters

This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16

sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one

poster-size document.

Printing_ 4

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2)

2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.

3. Select the page layout you want.

Specification of the page layout:

•Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.

•Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.

•Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.

4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters

or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to

make it easier to paste the sheets together.

5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.

6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.

Printing booklets

This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the

pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a

booklet.

If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4,

US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.

8

9

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down

list.

3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.

The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In

order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the

available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.

If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be

automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without

or mark).

4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.

Printing on both sides of paper

You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how

you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter,

Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.

We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such

as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It

may cause a paper jam or damage the machine.

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Basic tab.

3. From the Double-Sided Printing section, select the binding option you

want.

•Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by

the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine.

•None

•Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in

bookbinding.

•Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.

•Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the

print order when duplex printing.

4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.

5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Change percentage of your document

You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the

printed page by typing in a percentage you want.

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Paper tab.

3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.

You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.

4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options.

5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Fitting your document to a selected paper size

This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper

size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to

check fine details on a small document.

A

Printing_ 5

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Paper tab.

3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page.

4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options.

5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Using watermarks

The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.

For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading

“DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all

pages of a document.

There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They

can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.

Using an existing watermark

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the

Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in

the preview image.

3.Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.

Creating a watermark

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down

list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3.Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter

up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.

When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on

the first page only.

4.Select watermark options.

You can select the font name, style, size and shade from the Font

Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from

the Message Angle section.

5.Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.

6.When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the

Print window.

To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark

drop-down list.

Editing a watermark

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down

list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3.Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks

list and change the watermark message and options.

4.Click Update to save the changes.

5.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Deleting a watermark

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down

list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3.Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current

Watermarks list and click Delete.

4.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Using overlay (PCL driver only)

An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive

(HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.

Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than

using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly

the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter

with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted

letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your

document.

Creating a new page overlay

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing

your logo or image.

1.Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a

new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to

appear when printed as an overlay.

2.To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences

(See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

3.Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list.

Edit Overlay window appears.

4.In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.

5.In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the

File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The

default is C:\Formover.)

6.Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.

7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

8.The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk

drive.

The overlay document size must be the same as the document

you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a

watermark.

Using a page overlay

After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your

document. To print an overlay with a document:

1.Create or open the document you want to print.

2.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

3.Click the Advanced tab.

4.Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.

Printing_ 6

5.If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list,

select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you

want to use.

If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external

source, you can also load the file when you access the Load

window.

After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay

List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the

Overlay List box.

6.If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this

box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a

document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an

overlay on your document.

If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the

overlay automatically prints with your document.

7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

The selected overlay prints on your document.

The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that

of the document you will print with the overlay.

Deleting a page overlay

You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.

1.In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.

2.Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.

3.Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.

4.Click Delete.

5.When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.

6.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Job Setting (CLX-6250 Series only)

This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using the

512 MB optional memory or hard disk.

Store, Spool, Normal, Proof and Print Schedule mode is available

only if you have installed the optional hard disk.

•Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing

without saving the printing file in the memory.

-Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the

optional memory.

-Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You

can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of copies later.

-Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential document.

You need to enter a password to print.

-Store: Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk without

printing.

-Spool: This option can be useful to handle large amount of data. If you

select this setting, the print spools the document into the hard disk

and then prints it from the hard disk queue, decreasing the

computer’s work load.

-Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified

time.

•User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using

the control panel.

•Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using

the control panel.

Graphics tab options

Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your

specific printing needs.

Adjusting color

If you feel the color difference between the printout and monitor, you

may change the color setting such as color contrast or color level.

The printer driver provides graphic options to adjust the print quality for

specific printing needs.

•If the option is grayed out or not shown, that option is not

applicable with the printer language you are using.

•This options you can select may vary depending on your printer

model.

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.Click the Graphics tab. Refer to the online help for each option’s

information provided from the Printing Preferences.

•Color Mode: You can choose color options between Color or

Grayscale. Setting to Color typically produces the best possible

print quality for color document. If you want to print a color

document in gray scale, select Grayscale.

BlackOptimization allows you to print in high quality black.

If you use this option, it might take longer to print.

To adjust color manually, select Advanced in Color Mode.

Simply slide the color balance slider in the Levels tab to adjust

color, or select Matching tab for driver provided color correction

for general image processing.

•Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a

normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black,

regardless of the color it appears on the screen.

You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button.

-True Type Options: This option determines what the driver

tells the printer about how to image the text in your

document. Select the appropriate setting according to the

status of your document.

-Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked,

the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory

(resident fonts) to print your document, rather than

downloading the fonts used in your document. Because

downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can

speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the

printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to

those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in

your document that are very different from those resident

in the printer, your printed output will appear very different

from what it looks like on the screen.

•Raster Compression: This option determines the compression

level of images for transferring data from computer to a printer. If

you set this option to Maximum, the printing speed will be high,

but the printing quality will be low. (PCL driver only)

•Graphic Controller: It allows user to emphasize edges of texts

and fine lines for improving readability and align each color

channel registration in color printing mode.

-Grayscale Enhancement: It allows users to preserve the

details of nature photos, and improve contrast and readability

among gray scaled colors, when printing color documents in

grayscale. (PCL driver only)

-Fine Edge: It allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine

lines for improving readability.

•Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner

cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant

reduction in print quality.

3.Select Apply after completing the settings.

Printing_ 7

Adjusting the sharpness and smoothness

Screen options

This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. The

three screen options are Normal, Enhanced and Detailed.

1.To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

2.Click the Graphics tab then select Advanced in Color Mode.

3.Select the Matching tab.

•Printer default: Follows the set value of Screen mode from the

printer.

•Normal: This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over

the entire page.

•Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and

smooth graphic/photo objects in the page.

•Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over

the entire page.

4.Select OK.

Enhancing glossiness (Windows only)

You can enhance the glossiness of the printout by using this feature.

•You can only print on one side of paper with this option.

•If you use this option, it might take longer to print.

1. To change the print settings from your software application, access

Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

2. Click the Basic tab.

3. Check Glossy Printing in Quality.

4. Select OK.

Postscript options

The following windows may differ, depending on your operating

system , printer models or the application you are using.

Following options are only supported on the Post Script driver.

Open the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2). Then click Graphic tab > PostScript Options.

•Output Option: This option allows you to select the output format for

PostScript files.

-Optimize for Speed: General format for PostScript files.

-Optimize for Portability: Creates a file that conforms to the Adobe

Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). This is a useful format

to use when you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a

different machine.

-Encapsulated PostScript(EPS): Creates a file as a image. This is a

useful format to use if you want include the file as an image in

another document that will be printed from a different program.

-Archive Format: Creates a PostScript file you can use it later.

•PostScript Language: This option allows you to choose the PostScript

language level.

•Send PostScript Error Handler: If this options is checked, the

machine prints an error page when an error occurs during printing.

Using direct printing utility (CLX-6250 Series

only)

This chapter explains how to use the Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files

without having to open the files.

•Hard disk drive (HDD) should be installed on your machine, to print

PDF files using this program.

•You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print. Deactivate the

printing restriction feature, and retry printing.

•You cannot print PDF files that are protected by a password.

Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.

•Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing

Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created.

•The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1.4 and

below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.

What is Direct Printing Utility?

Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your

machine to print without having to open the file. It sends data through the

Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF

format.

To install this program, select Custom installation and put a check mark in

this program when you install the printer driver.

Printing

There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.

From the Direct Printing Utility window

1.From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung

Printers > Direct Printing Utility > Direct Printing Utility.

Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your

desktop.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens.

2.Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click

Browse.

3.Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open.

The PDF file is added in the Selected Files section.

4.Customize the machine settings for your needs.

5.Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.

Printing_ 8

Using the shortcut icon

1. Select the PDF file you wish to print, drag and drop it to the Direct Printing

Utility shortcut icon on your desk top. The selected PDF file is sent to the

default machine.

If the default machine does not support Direct Printing Utility, the

message window alerting you to select the appropriate machine

opens. Select the appropriate machine in the Select Printer section.

2. Customize the machine settings for your needs.

3. Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.

Using the right-click menu

1. Right-click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing

Utility.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.

2. Select the machine you wish to use.

3. Customize the machine settings for your needs.

4. Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.

Changing the default print settings

1. Click the Windows Start menu.

2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices

and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

3. Right-click your machine.

4. For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select

the Printing preferences.

If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

5. Change the settings on each tab.

6. Click OK.

If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in

Printing Preferences.

Setting your machine as a default machine

1. Click the Windows Start menu.

2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices

and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

3. Select your machine.

4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2

If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

Printing to a file (PRN)

You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.

To create a file:

1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.

2. Click Print.

3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.

For example c:\Temp\file name.

If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My

Documents.

Using the job accounting option

This option allows you to print with the given permission.

1. Install the driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on

page 3 or "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 3).

2. Click the Windows Start menu.

3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices

and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

4. Right-click your machine.

5. For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.

•For PS driver, select PS driver and right-click to open Properties.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select

the Printer properties.

If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer

drivers connected with selected printer.

6. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.

7. Click Job Accounting and select one of the options.

•User permission: If you check this option, only users with user

permission can start a print job.

•Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group

permission can start a print job.

Printing_ 9

•If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job

Accounting Password Encryption.

•Administrators can enable job accounting and configure

permissions in SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.

8. Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window.

Macintosh printing

This section explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print

environment before printing.

•USB connected (See "Macintosh" on page 4).

•Network connected (See "Macintosh" on page 5).

Printing a document

When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver

setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a

Macintosh:

1. Open the document you want to print.

2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some

applications).

3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options and make

sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.

4. Open the File menu and click Print.

5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you

want to print.

6. Click Print.

Changing printer settings

You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.

Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine

name, which appears in the printer properties pane may differ depending on

the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer

properties pane is similar to the following.

•The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh

OS version.

•The following panes may differ, depending on your operating system

or the application you are using.

The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer

properties pane. Select other advanced features from the drop down list.

Layout

The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears

on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.

Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the

following features.

•Pages Per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be

printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of

paper" on page 10).

•Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing

direction on a page similar to the examples on UI.

•Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on

the sheet.

•Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides of a paper

(See "Printing on both sides of paper" on page 10).

•Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180

degrees.

Graphics

The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Quality. Select

Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the

graphic features.

•Quality: This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The

higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and

graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to

print a document.

•Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to Color typically

produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you

want to print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale.

•BlackOptimization: allows you to print in high quality black. If you use

this option, it might take longer to print.

•Advanced

-Page Color Setting: This option allows you to print some pages in

color and other pages in mono within a document. For example,

if you want to print pages 1~4 in color and you have chosen

Grayscale in the Graphic tab, select Color then type in 1-4.

Job Accounting

This option allows you to print with the given permission.

•User permission: If you check this option, only users with user

permission can start a print job.

•Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group

permission can start a print job.

•If you want to encrypt job accounting password, refer to help

on the bottom left coner of the printer properties pane.

Printing_ 10

•Administrators can enable job accounting and configure

permissions in SyncThru™Web Admin Service.

Job Setting (CLX-6250 Series only)

This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using

the 512 MB optional memory or Hard disk.

Store, Spool, Normal and Print Schedule mode is available only

if you have installed the optional hard disk.

•Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing

without saving the printing file in the memory.

-Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the

optional memory.

-Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential document.

You need to enter a password to print.

-Store: Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk

without printing.

-Spool: This option can be useful to handle large amount of data. If

you select this setting, the print spools the document into the

hard disk and then prints it from the hard disk queue, decreasing

the computer’s work load.

-Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a

specified time.

•User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using

the control panel.

•Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file

using the control panel.

Paper

Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from

which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If

you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper

type.

Printer Features

•Reverse Duplex Printing: This option allows you to select general

print order compared to duplex print order. If this option does not

appear, your machine does not have this feature.

•Darken Text: Select this option to print texts darker than on a normal

document.

•Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any

selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be

useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.

•RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are rendered.

Standard is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this

mode is the closest to that of standard monitor (sRGB Monitor).

Vivid mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.

The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color images

than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best used for printing

fine lines, small characters and color drawings. The color tone of

Device mode may be different from that of monitor, the pure toner

colors are used for printing cyan, magenta and yellow colors.

•Screen: This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color

output.

Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature

provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.

2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages

per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print

on one sheet of paper.

3. Select the other options you want to use.

4. Click Print, then machine prints the selected number of pages you want

to print on one sheet of paper.

Printing on both sides of paper

You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode,

decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The

binding options are, as follows:

•Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in

book binding.

•Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.

1. From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.

2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.

3. Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option.

4. Select the other options you want to use.

5. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected number of pages on a

side of a paper.

If you print more than 2 copies, the last page of the first copy and the

first page of the second copy might print on same sheet of paper.

Avoid using this feature when you are printing more than 1 copy.

Linux printing

Printing from applications

The following windows may differ, depending on your operating

Printing_ 11

system , printer models or the application you are using.

There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common

UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any

such application.

1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu

2. Select Print directly using lpr.

3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from

the printer list and click Properties.

4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at

the top of the window.

•General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper

type and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex

feature, adds start and end banners and changes the number of

pages per sheet.

•Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the

text options, such as spacing or columns.

•Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used

when printing image files, such as color options, image size, or

image position.

•Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper

source and special print features.

5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.

6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.

7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your

print job.

To abort the current job, click Cancel.

Printing files

You can print many different types of files on your machine using the

standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS

lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the

standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.

To print any document file:

1. Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press

Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.

When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print

window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click

Open.

2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change

the print job properties.

3. Click OK to start printing.

Configuring Printer Properties

Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers

configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as

a printer.

1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.

If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.

2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.

3. The Printer Properties window opens.

The following five tabs display at the top of the window:

•General: This option allows you to change the printer location and

name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in

Printers configuration.

•Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If

you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa

while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.

•Driver: This option allows you to view or select another machine

driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options.

•Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to

cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check

box to see previous jobs on the job list.

•Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click

Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click

Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected

class.

4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties

window.

Printing_ 12

UNIX printing

Proceeding the print job

After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, PS or HPGL files

to print.

1. Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.

For example, you are printing “document1”

printui document1

This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the

user can select various print options.

2. Select a printer which has been already added.

3. Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.

4. Select how many copies needed in Number of Copies.

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer

driver, press Properties (See "Changing the printer settings" on

page 12).

5. Press OK to start the print job.

Changing the printer settings

The UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select

various print options in printer Properties.

The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK and “A”

for Apply and “C” for Cancel.

General tab

•Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter or other paper sizes,

according to your requirements.

•Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list

box are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.

•Paper Source: Select the source of the page. By default, it is Auto

Selection.

•Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a

page.

•Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.

•Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of paper.

•Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g.: Single-line

hairline, Double-line hairline)

Image tab

In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution or an image

position of your document.

Text tab

Set the character margin, line space or the columns of the actual print

output.

HPGL/2 tab

•Use only black pen: To print all graphics in black.

•Fit plot to page: Fit the entire graphic into a single page.

•Pen Width: Change value to increase the thickness of pen lines. By

default, it is 1000.

Margins tab

•Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins

are not enabled. The user can change the margin settings by

changing the values in the respective fields. Set by default, these

values depend on the page size selected.

•Unit: Change the units to points, inches or centimeters.

Samsung Printer tab

Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize

various settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on

the PPD file.

Copying_ 1

1.copying

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.

This chapter includes:

•Basic copy

•Changing the settings for each copy

•Changing the default copy settings

•Using special copy features

•Copying both sides of the originals

•Setting copy timeout

Basic copy

This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. If necessary, adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce/Enlarge,

Darkness, Original Type and more (See "Changing the settings for

each copy" on page 1).

4. Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if

necessary.

5. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

To cancel the current copy job, press Stop/Clear on the control panel.

Changing the settings for each copy

Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly

and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for

each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.

If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all of the

options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and

return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in

progress.

Changing the darkness

If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can

adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the contrast mode you want is highlighted

and press OK.

•Lightest: Works well with darker print.

•Light: Works well with dark print.

•Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.

•Dark: Works well with light print.

•Darkest: Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Selecting the type of originals

The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the

document type for the current copy job.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Original Type and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the image mode you want is highlighted

and press OK.

•Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.

•Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.

•Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.

•Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Selecting the scan size of originals

You can choose the size to be scanned.

The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner

glass.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Size and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the scan size you want is highlighted and

press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Copying_ 2

Reducing or enlarging copies

You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400%

when you copy original documents from the scanner glass, or from 25% to

100% from the document feeder.

To select from the predefined copy sizes:

1.Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2.Press Menu on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reduce/Enlarge and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow until the size setting you want is highlighted

and press OK.

6.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate:

1.Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2.Press Menu on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Reduce/Enlarge and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Custom and press OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow or numeric keypad to enter the copy size you

want. Pressing and holding the up/down arrow allows you to quickly

scroll to the number you want.

7.Press OK to save the selection.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the

bottom of your copy.

Changing the default copy settings

The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size, collation and

number of copies, can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy

a document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed

by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and

press OK.

7. Repeat steps 5 through 6, as needed.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear cancels the

changed settings and restores the defaults.

Using special copy features

You can use the following copy features:

ID card copying

Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet of A4-, Letter-,

Legal-, Folio-, Executive-, B5, A5, or A6-sized paper.

The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper

and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.

This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business

card.

•This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the

scanner glass.

•The size of the 2-sided originals should be smaller than A5, if not,

some of it won’t be copied.

1. Press ID Copy on the control panel.

2. Place Front Side Press appears on the display.

3. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass

where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

4. Press Start on the control panel.

Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Rear

Side Press .

5. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows

indicate as shown then, close the scanner lid.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

•If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not

be printed.

•If you press Stop/Clear, the machine cancles the copy job and

returns to ready mode.

Deciding the form of copy output

You can set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2

copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print

followed by a second complete document.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press OK and enter the number of copies using the number keypad.

4. Press Menu on the control panel.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Collation and press OK.

8. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

Copying_ 3

•On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

•Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

10. Press Start to begin copying.

One complete document will print followed by the second complete

document.

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)

The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages

onto one sheet of paper.

2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the

document feeder.

1 2

1 2

3 4

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until 2up or 4up highlights and press OK.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

8. Press Start to begin copying.

You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce/Enlarge for the N-Up

feature.

Poster copying

Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages

together to make one poster-sized document.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Poster Copy and press OK.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

8. Press Start to begin copying.

Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and

printed one by one in the following order:

Clone copying

The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number

of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper

size.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clone Copy and press OK.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

8. Press Start to begin copying.

You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce/Enlarge for the Clone

Copy feature.

Book copying

The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too

thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close

the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with

the cover open.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Book Copy and press OK.

Copying_ 4

7. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Does not use this feature.

•Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book.

•Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book.

•Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book.

8. Press OK.

9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

10. Press Start to begin copying.

Adjusting background images

You can set the printer to print an image without its background. This copy

feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an

original containing color in the background, such as a newspaper or a

catalog.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Adjust Bkgd. and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Does not use this feature.

•Auto: Optimizes the background.

•Enhance Lev.1 ~ 2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the

background is.

•Erase Lev.1 ~ 4: The higher the number is, the lighter the background

is.

7. Press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

9. Press Start to begin copying.

Margin shift copying

The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a binding edge for the

document. The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and/or

shifted to the right or left.

The Margin Shift feature can either be used for scanner glass or

document feeder depending on the set up.

•Auto Center: Scanner glass

•Custom Margin: Scanner glass, Document feeder

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Margin Shift and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Does not use this feature.

•Auto Center: Automatically copy in the center of the paper.

•Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using Number

keypad.

7. Press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

9. Press Start to begin copying.

Edge erase copying

Edge erase allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and staple

marks along any of the four edges of a document.

The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scanner glass or

document feeder depending on the set up.

•Small Original: Scanner glass

•Hole Punch: Scanner glass, Document feeder

•Book Center: Scanner glass

•Border Erase: Scanner glass, Document feeder

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Edge Erase and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Does not use this feature.

•Small Original: Erases the edge of the original if it is small.

•Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.

•Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and

horizontal, when you copy a book.

•Border Erase: Erases the certain amount of the edge of the printout.

7. Press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

9. Press Start to begin copying.

Gray enhance copying

When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better

quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Gray Enhance and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to select On.

7. Press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

9. Press Start to begin copying.

Watermark copying

You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it

when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or

Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the

copy.

Copying_ 5

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Menu on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight WaterMark and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding Message option you want is

highlighted and OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the binding Pages option you want is

highlighted and OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

9. Press Start to begin copying.

Copying both sides of the originals

You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.

The Duplex options may vary between document feeder or scanner

glass.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Duplex on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Prints in normal mode.

•1->2Side Short: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.

2

5

3

•1->2Side Long: Prints pages to be read like a book.

•2->1Side: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a

separate sheet.

•2->2Side: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of

the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the

originals.

•2->1Side ROT2: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one

on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the

printout is rotated 180°.

5. Press OK to save your selection.

6. Start copying a document.

Setting copy timeout

You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default control

panel settings, if you press Start button prior to the control panel restoring

to default, the previous job will be reprinted.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Timeout and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the time setting you want is highlighted.

Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default

settings until you press Start to begin copying, or Stop/Clear to cancel.

6. Press OK to save the selection.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Scanning_ 1

1.scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.

This chapter includes:

•Basic scanning method

•Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)

•Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)

•Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to server)

•Setting authentication for authorized user

•Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager

•Changing the scan feature settings

•Changing the default scan settings

•Scan on both sides of paper

•Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software

•Scanning using the WIA driver

•Macintosh scanning

•Linux scanning

The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various

factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the

size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,

depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not

be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced

resolution.

Basic scanning method

You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the

network. The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your

documents:

•Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: Scan the originals from the control

panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected

computers My Documents folder. When you install all the software in

the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is also

automatically installed on your computer. This feature can be used via

the local connection or the network connection (See "Using Samsung

Scan and Fax Manager" on page 5).

•TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning

an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the

scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or

the network connection (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software"

on page 6).

•SmarThru Office : This program is the accompanying software for your

machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This

feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection

(See "Smarthru Office" on page 3).

•WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature,

your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB

cable (See "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 6).

•USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image

onto an USB memory device (See "Scanning to an USB memory

device" on page 1).

•Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See

"Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on

page 1).

•FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server (See

"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to server)" on

page 4).

•SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB

server (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to

server)" on page 4).

Scanning originals and sending through email

(Scan to Email)

You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several

destinations from the machine by email.

Setting up an email account

To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up

network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.

A log-in page appears.

5. Type in the ID and Password then click Login .

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

6. Click Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).

7. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

8. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 25.

9. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require

authentication.

10. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.

11. Click Apply.

If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP,

put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP

Authentication.

a) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

b)Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port

number is 110.

Scanning_ 2

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as

an email attachment

1. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

2. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To Email and press OK.

If you registered My Log in ID, Password and checked Local

Authentication in User Access Control on SyncThru™ Web

Service, Login Name and Enter Password appear. Enter the

Auth ID and Password to your machine. Go to step 5.

4. When From: appears on the top line of the display, enter the sender’s

email address and press OK.

5. When Destination Email: appears on the top line of the display, enter

the recipient’s email address and press OK.

6. To enter additional addresses, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes

and press OK.

To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to highlight No

and press OK.

7. If the displays asks if you want to send the email to your account, press

the left/right arrow to highlight Yes or No and press OK.

This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Auto Send

To Self option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on

SyncThru™ Web Service.

8. Enter an email subject and press OK.

9. Press the up/down arrow until the file type you want is highlighted and

press OK.

When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.

While the machine is sending an email, you cannot use the

machine to copy or to send a fax.

10. Press the Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Storing email addresses

You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently

via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email

addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address

Book.

Storing on your local machine

This method means that you store email addresses on your machine’s

memory. You can add addresses, as well as group them in particular

categories.

Individual

1.Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2.Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3.Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service

website.

A log-in page appears.

5.Type in the ID and Password then click Login.

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

6.Click Address Book > Individual.

7.Click Add.

8.When the Add screen appears, select the Speed No. number and

enter e-mail address and fax number.

If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB

or FTP and set the information.

9.Click Apply.

Group

1.Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2.Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3.Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service

website.

A log-in page appears.

5.Type in the ID and Password then click Login.

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

6.Make sure you have configured individual address book.

7.Click Address Book > E-mail Group .

8.Click Add Group.

9.When the Add Group screen appears, select the Speed No. number

and enter Group Name.

You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add

individual(s) after this group is created.

10.Click Apply.

Searching Address Book for an entry

There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either

scan from 0 to 199 sequentially or search by entering the first letters of

the name associated with the address.

Searching sequentially through memory

1.Press (Scan/Email) and Address Book on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.

Scanning_ 3

3.Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight All and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow until the name and address you want is

highlighted. You can search upwards or downwards through the

entire memory in index (numerical) order.

Searching with a particular first letter

1.Press (Scan/Email) and Address Book on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and

press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight ID and press OK.

5.Enter the first few letters of the name you want.

6.Press the up/down arrow until the name you want is highlighted and

press OK.

Printing Address Book

You can check your Address Book information by printing a list.

1.Press (Scan/Email) and Address Book on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and

press OK.

Your Address Book information prints out.

Scanning originals and sending to your

computer (Scan to PC)

You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager program that is installed in your networked computer.

For USB connected machine

This is a basic scanning method for usb connected machine.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Local PC and press OK.

If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the application program you want is

highlighted and press OK.

Default setting is My Documents.

To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or

delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager > Properties > Set Scan Button.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and

press OK.

•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.

•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.

•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.

•Scan Size: Sets the image size.

•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan

destination to My Documents.

•If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.

8. Scanning begins.

•Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My

Pictures > Samsung folder.

•You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and

Fax Manager program.

•You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control Panel >

Samsung Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan.

For network connected machine

Make sure the scanner printer driver is installed on your computer using the

software CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program it does not

need to be installed separartely in most cases (See "Installing network

connected machine’s driver" on page 3).

1. Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a

network and Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is installed on the

computer.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network PC and press OK.

If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.

6. Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if

necessary.

•ID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for Samsung

Scan and Fax Manager.

•Password is the 4 digit number registered Password for

Samsung Scan and Fax Manager.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the application program you want

highlights and press OK.

Default setting is My Documents.

To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or

delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager > Properties > Set Scan Button.

8. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and

press OK.

•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.

•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.

•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.

•Scan Size: Sets the image size.

•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan

destination to My Documents.

•If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.

9. Scanning begins.

•Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My

Pictures > Samsung folder.

•You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in using the Samsung

Scan and Fax Manager program.

•You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control Panel >

Scanning_ 4

Samsung Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan.

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP

(Scan to server)

You can scan an image and send it to a total of five destinations via the

SMB or FTP.

Setting up an FTP server

To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP

servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a your web browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.

A log-in page appears.

5. Type in the ID and Password then click Login.

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

6. Click Address Book > Individual.

7. Click Add.

8. Check the box next to Add FTP.

9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 21.

11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to permit

access to unauthorized people.

This box is unchecked by default.

12. Enter the Login Name and Password.

13. Enter the Path for saving the scanned image.

14. Click Apply.

Setting up an SMB server

To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to SMB

servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a your web browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.

A log-in page appears.

5. Type in the ID and Password then click Login.

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

6. Click Address Book > Individual.

7. Click Add.

8. Check the box next to Add SMB.

9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 139.

11. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

12. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized

persons to access the SMB server.

This box is unchecked by default.

13. Enter the Login Name and Password.

14. Enter the Domain. If your server is joined to the certain domain, and you

are using the domain account to log in, enter the domain name.

Otherwise, just enter your computer name which is registered to the

SMB server.

15. Enter the Path for saving the scanned image. The folder (e.g. Scanned

Images) must be setup on the root and the folder properties need to be

setup as a share, with you listed as having user rights to the folder.

16. Click Apply.

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server

1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP,

and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight the server and file share required

then press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the scan format you want is highlighted

and press OK.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the

specified server.

Setting authentication for authorized user

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network

parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.

To send a scanned image through email or via network server safely, you

must register account information of authorized users to your local machine

using SyncThru™ Web Service.

Registering local authorized users

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in your web browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.

4. Click Security > User Access Control > User Authentication.

5. Select Local Authentication in the Authentication Method section.

6. Click Apply.

7. Click OK in the modifying confirmation pop-up window.

8. Click User Profile.

9. Click Add.

10. Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, E-mail Address and Fax

Number.

You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine

when you start scanning to email from the control panel.

11. Click Apply.

Scanning_ 5

Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager

If you have installed the printer driver, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager

program is installed too. Start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program to

find out about this program information and the installed scan driver's

condition. Through this program, you can change scan settings and add or

delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer.

The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in

the Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, See

"Setting scan information in Scan Manager" on page 7.

1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager.

You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right clicking

the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan

Manager.

2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager window.

3. Press Properties.

4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination

and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.

You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab.

(Local or Network)

5. When setting is done, press OK.

Set Scan Button tab

Scan Destination

•Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently

linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program

you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel

Destination List.

•Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open

scanned images.

•Add Application: Allows you to add an application you want to use to

the Available Destination List.

•Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the

user from the Available Destination List.

•File Format: Allows you to select the format of scanned data to be

saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF and TIFF.

Scan Property

•Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.

•Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default saving

folder.

•Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.

•Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.

•Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.

•ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not

support this option, it will be grayed out.

•Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan

options. You can modify the options before scanning.

•Default: Allows you to go back to default options.

Change Port tab

•Local Scanner: Select when your machine is connected via USB or

LPT port.

•Network Scanner: Select when your machine is connected via network

port.

-Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your machine.

-IP or Host name: Enter in your machine’s IP address or host name to

detect your machine.

Scan Assistant

You can scan by pressing Samsung Scan and Fax Manager > Quick

Scan.

The Scan Assistant window allows you to adjust scan settings and start the

scanning process.

•Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for

future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are

saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop down

list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you

selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop

down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select the favorite

you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default button.

•Scan sttings: The following scan options are available:

-Image Type: Allows you to chose the proper color settings for image

scanning.

-Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution.

-Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the scanned

image.

-Document Source: Allows you to choose the device (document

feeder or scan glass) you want to scan with.

-Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you can

scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you scan

multipage documents and/or when Document Source is set to

Flatbed (platen glass). In this case a sequence of scanned images is

processed as a single document

-Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be

scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set to

ADF(Document feeder).

•Preference: The following scan options are available:

-Auto-crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the

scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size.

-Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the scanning

area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview.

-Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects whether

the scanned image is blank or not.

-Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the

scanning process.

-Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator. That

is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will

divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each part will be

treated as a separate document (group).

-Start from scanner: If this option is checked, scanning process is

managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the computer.

The option is not available for some scanner models.

•Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as Image

Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional Settings are

available.

-Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations of

the scanned image. These transformations include automatic

adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation.

-Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of the

image and improve its quality.

-Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned images.

These transformations include stitching several partial image scans

Scanning_ 6

into a single image, processing of scanned books and watermark

stamping.

Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and

click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window

appears with information about that option's feature which is provided

from the Scan Assistant.

Changing the scan feature settings

Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to

customize your scan jobs. The settings you change will be maintained for a

certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.

•Scan Size: Sets the image size.

•Original Type: Sets the original documents’s type.

•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.

•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.

•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If

you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.

Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.

To customize the settings before starting a scan job:

1. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down until the scan type you want is highlighted and press

OK.

5. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press

OK.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options.

8. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Changing the default scan settings

To avoid having to change the scan settings for each job, you can set up

default scan settings for each scan type.

1. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK.

4. Press OK when Change Default highlights .

5. Press the up/down until the scan type you want is highlighted and press

OK.

6. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status highlights and press

OK.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options.

9. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Scan on both sides of paper

This is available only when you load originals into the document

feeder.

By using the Duplex button on your machine, you can set the machine to

scan on both sides of paper.

1. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Duplex on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted.

•Off: Scans in normal mode.

•2 Side: Scans on both sides of the original.

•2->1Side ROT2: Scans on both sides of the original and prints each

one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the

printout is rotated 180°.

5. Press OK to save your selection.

Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software

If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use

TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.

Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.

4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.

5. Scan and save your scanned image.

Scanning using the WIA driver

Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for

scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by

Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike

the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust

images without using additional software.

The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista/7 with a USB port.

Windows XP

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel, > Scanners and Cameras.

4. Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera

Wizard appears.

5. Click Next.

6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click

Preview to see how your options affect the picture.

7. Click Next.

8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the

picture.

9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose

one of the options on screen.

10. Click Next.

11. Click Finish.

Scanning_ 7

Windows Vista

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Scanners and Cameras.

4. Double click Scan a document or picture. Windows Fax and Scan

application appears.

•You can click on View scanners and cameras to view scanners,

•If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint

program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera... .

5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.

6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your

preferences affect the picture.

7. Click Scan.

If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the

Scanner and Camera Wizard.

Windows 7

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

4. Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes

> Start Scan. New Scan application appears.

5. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your

preferences affect the picture.

6. Click Scan.

Macintosh scanning

You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Macintosh OS

offers Image Capture program.

Scanning with USB

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.

If No Image Capture device connected message appears,

disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem

continues, refer to the Image Capture’s help.

4. Set the scan options on this program.

5. Scan and save your scanned image.

•For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image

Capture’s help.

•Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.

•You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe

Photoshop.

•Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please

refer to the user’s guide of the software.

•If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to

the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X

10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.

Scanning with network

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered

on.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.

4. For Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5

Click Devices and click Browse Devices.

For Mac OS X 10.6

Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.

5. For Mac OS X 10.4:

Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use

TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click Connect.

•If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port.

•If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port.. to

select port.

Refer to Scan Manager for Change port.. use (See "Setting

scan information in Scan Manager" on page 7).

For Mac OS X 10.5:

Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in

Bonjour Devices.

If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X 10.4 steps

above.

6. Set the scan options on this program.

7. Scan and save your scanned image.

•For more information about using Image Capture,refer to the Image

Capture’s help.

•Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.

•You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe

Photoshop.

•Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please

refer to the user’s guide of the software.

•If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to

the latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X

10.4.7 or higher.

Setting scan information in Scan Manager

To find out about Scan Manager program information, to check the

installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings. and to add or

delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in

Scan Manager program, follow these instructions:

1.From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan Manager.

2.Select the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager.

3. Press Properties.

4.Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings,

to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can

change the scanning machine by using Change port. (Local or

Network)

Scanning_ 8

5.When done, press OK.

Linux scanning

You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.

Scanning

1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.

2. Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.

3. Select the scanner on the list.

If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer

and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically

selected.

If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can

select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is

in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set

the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.

4. Click Properties.

5. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the platen glass

(See "Loading originals" on page 1).

6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.

The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the

Preview Pane.

7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview

Pane.

8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.

•Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color composition

and the scan resolution for the image.

•Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The

Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.

If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the

option from the Job Type drop-down list (See "Adding Job Type

Settings" on page 8).

Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options.

9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.

The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the

progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.

10. The scanned image appears.

If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar (See "Using the

Image Manager" on page 9).

11. When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.

12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the

file name.

13. Click Save.

Adding Job Type Settings

You can save your scan option settings for later use.

To save a new Job Type setting:

1.Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.

2.Click Save As.

3.Enter the name for your setting.

4.Click OK.

Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.

To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:

1.Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.

2.The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved

setting is automatically selected for the scan job.

Scanning_ 9

To delete a Job Type setting

1.Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down

list.

2.Click Delete.

The setting is deleted from the list.

Using the Image Manager

The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and

tools to edit your scanned image.

Use the following tools to edit the image:

Tools Name Function

Save Saves the image.

Undo Cancels your last action.

Redo Restores the action you canceled.

Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image.

Crop Crops the selected image area.

Zoom Out Zooms the image out.

Zoom In Zooms the image in.

Scale Allows you to scale the image size; you can

enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale

proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.

Rotate Allows you to rotate the image; you can select

the number of degrees from the drop-down list.

Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or

horizontally.

Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast

of the image, or to invert the image.

Properties Shows the properties of the image.

For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on

screen help.

Faxing_ 1

1.faxing

This chapter gives you information about using the fax feature in your machine.

This chapter includes:

•Preparing to fax

•Using a fax in your computer

•Sending a fax

•Receiving a fax

•Adjusting the document settings

•Forwarding a fax to another destination

•Setting up address book

•Printing sent fax report automatically

•You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone line.

For more information ask your internet service provider.

•We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN:

public switched telephone network) when connecting telephone

lines to use the Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN,

VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the

Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals

and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL

Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet

Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.

1Line port

2Micro filter

3DSL modem / Telephone line

Preparing to fax

Before you send a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall

jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection. The

method of making a telephone connection varies from one country to

another.

Using a fax in your computer

You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.

Sending a fax

To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program

must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the

printer driver.

1. Open the document to be sent.

2. Select Print from the File menu.

The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different

depending on your application.

3. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window

4. Click Print or OK.

5. Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.

If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.

Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax delivered to the recipients

successfully.

6. Click Send.

For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click Help.

Checking a sent fax list

You can check a sent fax list on your computer.

From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung

Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal

appears with the fax list you have sent.

Receiving a fax

If you have installed the printer driver, the Samsung Scan & Fax Manager

program is also installed. Start Samsung Scan & Fax Manager program to

find out about this program information and the installed driver's condition.

Through this program, you can change fax settings and add or delete the

folders where faxed documents are saved in your computer.

The Samsung Scan & Fax Manager program can only be used with

the Windows and Macintosh systems. Check if the forwarding a fax to

PC is set to On:

a)Press (Fax) on the control panel.

b)Press Menu on the control panel.

c)Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature appears and

press OK.

d)Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward appears and press

OK.

Faxing_ 2

e)Press the the up/down arrow to highlight PC: appears and press

OK.

1. Open the Samsung Scan & Fax Manager.

•For Windows, from the Start menu, click All programs > Samsung

Printers > Samsung Scan & Fax Manager > Samsung Scan &

Fax Manager.

Or you can open this program by right clicking the Smart Panel icon

in the Windows task bar and selecting the Samsung Scan & Fax

Manager.

•For Macintosh, from the Smart Panel menu on status bar, click

Samsung Scan & Fax Manager.

2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan & Fax

Manager.

3. Click Properties.

4. Use Set Fax Receiving to change the fax settings.

5. When setting is done, press OK.

Set Fax Receiving tab

•Enable Fax Receiving: You can select whether to use or not.

•File Format: You can convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.

•Save Location: Selects location to save the converted faxes.

•Prefix: Selects file or folder scheme as prefix.

•Notify me when fax received: Shows popup window to notify

receiving a fax.

•Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints information for

the received fax.

Change Port tab

•Local Scanner: Select when your machine is connected via USB or

LPT port.

•Network Scanner: Select when your machine is connected via

network port.

-Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your

machine.

-IP or Host name: Enter in your machine’s IP address or host name

to detect your machine.

Sending a fax

This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of

transmission.

When you place the originals, in the document feeder and/or on the

platen glass one at a time (See "Loading originals" on page 1). If the

originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner

glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first,

which has higher priority in scanning.

Setting the fax header

In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on

any fax you send.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine ID and press OK.

6. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You

can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and

include special symbols by pressing the 1 button. For details on how to

enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering characters using the

number keypad" on page 2.

7. Press OK to save the ID.

8. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Fax No. and press OK.

9. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.

10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Sending a fax

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See

"Adjusting the document settings" on page 6).

4. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.

You can use speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers. For details

about storing and searching for a number, see "Setting up address

book" on page 7.

5. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a

fax to destinations.

•If you want to send fax directly from your computer, use SmarThru

Office (See "Using SmarThru Office" on page 3).

•When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear before the

machine start transmission.

•If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message

asking to place another page.

•While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at the

same time.

Sending a fax manually

This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See

"Adjusting the document settings" on page 6).

4. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.

5. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.

6. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax

machine.

Faxing_ 3

When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while

sending.

Confirming a transmission

When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine

beeps and returns to ready mode.

When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message

appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their meanings, see

"Understanding display messages" on page 8. If you receive an error

message, press Stop/Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax

again.

You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each

time sending a fax is completed. For further details, see "Printing sent fax

report automatically" on page 9.

Automatic redialing

When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you

send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time

depends on the country's factory default setting. To change the time interval

between redials and the number of redial attempts (See "Changing the fax

setup options" on page 1).

When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number

without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear.

Redialing the last number

To redial the number you called last:

1. Press Redial/Pause on the control panel.

2. When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine

automatically begins to send.

If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another

page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,

select No when Another Page? appears.

Sending a fax to multiple destinations

You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to

multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to

a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased

from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See

"Adjusting the document settings" on page 6).

4. Press Menu on the control panel.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Multi Send and press OK.

7. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.

You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using

Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on

page 7.

8. Enter the second fax number and press OK.

The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.

9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat

steps 7 and 8. You can add up to 10 destinations.

10. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.

Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another

group dial numbers anymore.

11. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow

to select No when Another Page? appears.

12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another

pages. Load another original and press OK.

When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.

The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the

order in which you entered them.

Delaying a fax transmission

You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be

present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See

"Adjusting the document settings" on page 6).

4. Press Menu on the control panel.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delay Send and press OK.

7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.

You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using

Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on

page 7.

8. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.

9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat

steps 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.

Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another

group dial numbers anymore.

10. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow

to select No when Another Page? appears and press OK.

11. Enter the job name you want and press OK.

For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering

characters using the number keypad" on page 2.

If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.

12. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK.

If you set a time earier than the current time, the fax will be sent at

that time on the following day.

The original is scanned into memory before transmission.

13. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another

pages. Load another original and press OK.

When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.

The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you

are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved

in memory.

1.Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.

2.Press Menu on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Add Pages and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow until the fax job you want appears and press

OK.

When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.

The machine scans the original into memory.

Faxing_ 4

6.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Canceling a reserved delay fax job

You can cancel the delayed fax job which is saved in memory.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Cancel Job and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow until the fax job you want appears and press

OK.

5.Press OK when Yes highlights.

The selected fax is deleted from memory.

6.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Sending a priority fax

This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of

reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately

transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority

transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between

stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before

transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See

"Adjusting the document settings" on page 6).

4. Press Menu on the control panel.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Priority Send and press OK.

7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.

You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using

Address book button. For details, see "Setting up address book" on

page 7.

8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.

The original is scanned into memory before transmission.

9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another

pages. Load another original and press OK.

When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.

The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.

Sending faxes on both sides of paper

This is available only when you load originals into the document

feeder.

You can set the machine to send faxes on both sides of paper.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the

scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the

scanner lid.

3. Press Duplex on the control panel.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want highlights.

•Off: Send faxes in normal mode.

•2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.

•2->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints

each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side

of the printout is rotated 180°.

5. Press OK to save your selection.

Receiving a fax

This part explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods

available.

Changing the receive modes

Your machine is preset to Copy mode at the factory; however you can

change the default so fax is priority (See "Changing the default mode" on

page 2). When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a

specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax. But if you want

to change the Fax mode to another mode, follow the steps below:

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Mode and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the fax reception mode you want

highlights.

•Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax

reception mode.

•Tel: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start.

•Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine.

Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a

message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax

tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to

receive the fax.

•DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern

Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company

service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to

answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see

"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 5.

This setting may not be available depending on your country.

7. Press OK to save your selection.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

•To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the

EXT socket on the back of your machine.

•If you do not want other people to view your received documents,

you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode, all of the

received faxes are stored in memory. For further details, see

"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 5.

Receiving manually in Tel mode

You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing

Start when you hear a fax tone ; however you can change the default so fax

is priority (See "Changing the default mode" on page 2). The machine

begins receiving the fax.

To change the number of rings, see "Changing the fax setup options" on

page 1.

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax

mode

To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket

on the back of your machine (See "Rear view" on page 2).

If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message

as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it

automatically starts to receive the fax.

Faxing_ 5

•If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering

machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to

EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after

a predefined number of rings.

•If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the

machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.

•If you are in Tel mode when the answering machine is connected to

your machine, you must switch off the answering machine.

Otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering machine will

interrupt your phone conversation.

Receiving faxes manually using an extension

telephone

This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone

connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive

a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without

going to the fax machine.

When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press

the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the

remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.

*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last

asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you

wish. For details about changing the code, see "Changing the fax setup

options" on page 1

Receiving faxes using DRPD mode

Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to

use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.

The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different

ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short

ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who

answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which

number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.

Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax

machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered. Unless

you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and

answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the

extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.

You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.

Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on

your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will

need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial

your fax number from outside.

To set up the DRPD mode:

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight DRPD Mode and press OK.

Waiting Ring appears on the display.

6. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to

place the call from a fax machine.

7. When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine

requires several rings to learn the pattern.

When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed

DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.

Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 6.

•DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or

connect the machine to another telephone line.

•After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify

that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call

placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be

sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or

answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.

Receiving in secure receiving mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by

unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict

printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure

receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is

deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.

Activating secure receiving mode

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Secure Receive and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

6. Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK.

You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a

password, but cannot protect your faxes.

7. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your machine stores it in

memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax

received.

Printing received faxes

1.Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in

“Activating secure receiving mode.”

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.

3.Enter the four-digit password and press OK.

The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.

Deactivating secure receiving mode

1.Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in

“Activating secure receiving mode.”

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Off and press OK.

3.Enter the four-digit password and press OK.

The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in

memory.

4.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper

Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the received

fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Duplex Print and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the binding option you want highlights.

Faxing_ 6

•Off: Prints in Normal mode.

•Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.

•Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.

2

5

3

7. Press OK to save your selection.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Receiving faxes in memory

Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you

are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or

printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon

as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.

Adjusting the document settings

Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your

original’s status to get the best quality.

Resolution

The default document settings procedure good results when using typical

text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality,

or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher

quality fax.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Resolution and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and

press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are

described in the table below:

mode recommended for:

Standard Originals with normal sized characters.

Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or

originals printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine

mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are

communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.

•For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is

not available. The resolution setting is

automatically changed to Fine

•When your machine is set to Super Fine

resolution and the fax machine with which you

are communicating does not support Super

Fine resolution, the machine transmits using

the highest resolution mode supported by the

other fax machine.

Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.

The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the

default setting, see "Change default" on page 2.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want highlights and press

OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the

default setting, see "Change default" on page 2.

Scan size

You can choose the size to be scanned.

The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner

glass.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Size and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the scan size you want highlights and

press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Forwarding a fax to another destination

You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other

destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to

receive the fax, this feature may be useful.

When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server

and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (See "Using SyncThru™

Web Service" on page 1).

Forwarding a sent fax to another destination

You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another

destination.

mode recommended for:

Faxing_ 7

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

8. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and

press OK.

9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.

Forwarding a received fax to another destination

With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to another

destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in

the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been

completed, select Forward & Print.

8. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and

press OK.

9. Enter the starting time using up/down, left/right arrow or numeric keypad

and press OK.

10. Enter the ending time using up/down, left/right arrow or numeric keypad

and press OK.

11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax

machine.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an

email

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Email and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

8. Enter your email address and press OK.

9. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.

10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an

email

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Email and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been

completed, select Forward & Print.

8. Enter your email address and press OK.

9. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.

10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified email

addresses.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a

server

When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server, you must first set the

server in SyncThru™ Web Service (See "Setting up an FTP server"

on page 4 or "Setting up an SMB server" on page 4). You can forward

a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Server and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified server.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by

server

When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server, you must first set the

server in SyncThru™ Web Service (See "Setting up an FTP server"

on page 4 or "Setting up an SMB server" on page 4). You can forward

a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Server and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK.

To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been

completed, select Forward & Print.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified server.

Setting up address book

You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most

frequently. Your machine provides you with the following features for setting

up Address Book:

Before beginning to store fax numbers, make sure that your machine

Faxing_ 8

is in Fax mode.

Speed dial numbers

You can store up to 240 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial

numbers.

Registering a speed dial number

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK.

5.Enter a speed dial number between 1 and 240 and press OK.

If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display

shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with

another speed dial number, press Back.

6.Enter the name you want and press OK.

For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see ""Entering

characters using the number keypad" on page 2.

7.Enter the fax number you want and press OK.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Editing speed dial numbers

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK.

5.Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.

6.Change the name and press OK.

7.Change the fax number and press OK.

8.Change the name and press OK.

9.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Using speed dial numbers

When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a

fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you

want.

•For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the

corresponding digit button on the number keypad.

•For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)

and then hold down the last digit button.

You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address

Book (See "Searching address book for an entry" on page 8).

Group dial numbers

If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can

group these destinations and set them under a group dial number. You can

then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations

within the group. You can set up to 200 (0 through 199) group dial numbers

using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.

Registering a group dial number

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.

5.Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK.

If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display

shows the message to allow you to change it.

6.Enter the name you want and press OK.

For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see ""Entering

characters using the number keypad" on page 2.

7.Enter the first few letters of the speed dial’s name you want.

8.Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want

highlights and press OK.

9.Press OK when Yes highlights when Another Page? appears.

Repeat step 7 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.

10.When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No when

Another Page? appears and press OK.

11.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Editing a group dial number

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight New & Edit and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.

5.Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.

6.Enter the name you want to edit and press OK.

7.Enter the first few letters of the speed dial’s name you want to add or

delete.

8.Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want

highlights and press OK.

If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.

If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?

appears.

9.Press OK to add or delete the number.

10.Press OK when Yes highlights to add or delete more numbers and

repeat steps 7 and 8.

11.When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the

Another Number? and press OK.

12.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Using group dial numbers

To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from

memory.

When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,

press Address Book. See below.

Searching address book for an entry

There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan

from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the

name associated with the number.

Searching sequentially through the memory

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight All and press OK.

6.Press the up/down arrow until the name and number you want

highlights. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire

memory in alphabetical order.

Faxing_ 9

Searching sequentially through the memory

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search & Dial and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Search ID and press OK.

6.Enter the first few letters of the name you want.

7.Press the up/down arrow until the group dial’s name and number you

want highlights.

Deleting a Address Book for entry

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow until the deleting option you want is

highlighted and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow until the searching method you want

highlights and press OK.

Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all

entries in Address Book.

Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the

name.

6.Press the up/down arrow until the name you want is highlighted and

press OK.

Or, enter the first letters. Press the up/down arrow until the name you

want highlights and press OK.

7.Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm the deletion.

8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Printing Address Book

You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.

1.Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2.Press Address Book on the control panel.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Print and press OK.

The machine begins printing.

Printing sent fax report automatically

You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the

previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Auto Report and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight On and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Using USB memory device_ 1

1.using usb memory device

This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.

This chapter includes:

•About USB memory device

•Scanning to an USB memory device

•Printing from a USB memory device

•Backing up data

•Managing USB memory

About USB memory device

USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to

give you more room for storing documents, presentations, music and

videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to

store or move.

You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:

•Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.

•Print data stored on an USB memory device.

•Format the USB memory device.

Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and

sector size of 512 bytes.

Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.

You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type

connector.

Use only an USB memory device with metal-shielded connector.

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.

•Do not remove the USB memory device while it is in use. The

machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user’s

misuse.

•If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security

key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so

forth), do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The

files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the

machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these

features, see device’s User’s Guide.

Scanning to an USB memory device

You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB

memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the

device using the default settings, or you can customize your own scan

settings. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default settings

such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan setting.

If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,

security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not use

the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the USB

memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not automatically

detect it. For details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.

Scanning

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single

original face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press (Scan/Email) and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan To USB and press OK.

Your machine begins scanning the original, and then asks if you want to

scan another page.

5. To scan another page, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes and

press OK. Load an original and press Start.

Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to highlight No and press OK.

6. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device

from the machine.

Customizing scan to USB

You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to

USB job.

1. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight USB Feature and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight the setting you want and press OK.

You can set the following options:

•Scan Size: Sets the image size.

Using USB memory device_ 2

The scan size options may vary between document feeder or

scanner glass.

•Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.

•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.

•Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,

you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.

•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.

When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple

pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in

Scan Color.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status is highlighted and press

OK.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options.

8. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

You can change the default scan settings. For details, see "Changing the

default scan settings" on page 6.

Printing from a USB memory device

You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print

TIFF, BMP, JPEG and PRN files.

If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,

security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not use

the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the USB

memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not automatically

detect it. For details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.

Direct Print option supported file types:

•PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are

compatible. PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check

box when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN

file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion

can be printed directly from USB memory device (See "Printing to a file

(PRN)" on page 8).

If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout

would be different .

•BMP: BMP Uncompressed

•TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline

•JPEG: JPEG Baseline

•PDF: PDF 1.4 and below

To print a document from a USB memory device:

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine. If one has already been inserted, press Direct USB.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight USB Print and press OK.

Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on

it.

3. Press the up/down arrow until the folder or file you want is highlighted

and press OK.

If you see + in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or

folders in the selected folder.

4. If you selected a file, skip to the next step.

If you selected a folder, press the up/down arrow until the file you want is

highlighted and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or

enter the number.

6. Press OK or Start to start printing the selected file.

After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.

7. To print another document, press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes and

press OK. Repeat from step 3.

Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to highlight No and press OK.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Backing up data

Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power

failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect your Address Book

entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB

memory device.

Backing up data

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Export Setting and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want is highlighted.

•Address Book: Backs up all Address Book entries.

•Setup Data: Backs up all system settings.

7. Press OK to begin backing up the data.

The data is backed up to the USB memory.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Restoring data

1. Insert a USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the

USB memory port.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Import Setting and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the data type you want is highlighted and

press OK.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the file containing the data you want to

restore highlights and press OK.

8. To restore the backup file to the machine, press the left/right arrow to

highlight Yes and press OK.

9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Managing USB memory

You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or

all at once by reformatting the device.

After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot

be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data

before deleting it.

Deleting an image file

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the folder or file you want is highlighted

and press OK.

Using USB memory device_ 3

If you see + in the front of a folder name, there are one or more

files or folders in the selected folder.

If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about 2

seconds. Go to the next step.

If you selected a folder, press the up/down arrow until the file you want

to delete highlights and press OK.

6. To delete file, press the up/down arrow to highlight Yes and press OK.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Formatting a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Format and press OK.

5. To format USB memory device, Press the up/down arrow to highlight

Yes and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Viewing the USB memory status

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Press Direct USB on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Check Space and press OK.

The available memory space appears on the display.

4. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Machine status and advanced feature_ 1

1.machine status and advanced feature

This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced

machine setup. Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.

This chapter includes:

•Fax setup

•Copy setup

•Scan setup

•Printing a report

•Clearing memory

•Network

•Document management

•Job management

•Menu overview

Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or

models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.

Fax setup

Changing the fax setup options

Your machine provides you with various user-selectable options for setting

up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences

and needs.

To change the fax setup options:

1. Press (Fax) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the fax setup item you want is highlighted

and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and

press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status appears or enter the

value for the option you have selected, and press OK.

7. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 6.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Sending

Option Description

Redial Times You can specify the number of redial attempts. If

you enter 0, the machine will not redial.

Redial Term Your machine can automatically redial a remote

fax machine if it was busy. You can set an

interval between attempts.

Prefix Dial You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This

number dials before any automatic dial number

is started. It is useful for accessing a PABX

exchange.

ECM Mode This mode helps with poor line quality and

makes sure any faxes you send are sent

smoothly to any other ECM-equipped fax

machine. Sending a fax using ECM may take

more time.

Send Report You can set your machine to print a confirmation

report showing whether a transmission was

successful, how many pages were sent, and

more. The available options are On, Off, and

On-Error, which prints only when a transmission

is not successful.

Image TCR This function allows users to know what fax

messages have been sent by showing sent

messages in the transmission report.

The first page of the message is turned into an

image file than is printed on the transmission

report so the users can see what messages

have been sent.

However, you can not use this function when

sending fax without saving the data in the

memory.

Dial Mode This setting may not be available depending on

your country. If you cannot reach this option,

your machine does not support this feature.

You can set the dial mode for your machine to

either tone dialing or pulse dialing. If you have a

public telephone system or a private branch

exchnage (PBX) system, you may need to select

Pulse. Contact your local telephone company if

you are not sure which dial mode to use.

If you select Pulse, some phone system

features might not be available. It can also take

longer to dial a fax or phone number.

Receiving

Option Description

Receive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode.

For details on receiving faxes in each mode, see

"Changing the receive modes" on page 4.

Ring To Answer You can specify the number of times the

machine rings before answering an incoming

call.

Option Description

Machine status and advanced feature_ 2

Change default

Option Description

Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the

appearance of the received document.

•Standard: Originals with normal sized

characters.

•Fine: Originals containing small characters

or thin lines or originals printed using a

dot-matrix printer.

•Super Fine: Originals containing extremely

fine detail. Super Fine mode is enabled only

if the machine with which you are

communicating also supports the Super

Fine resolution.

•For memory transmission, Super Fine

mode is not available. The

resolution setting is automatically

changed to Fine.

•When your machine is set to Super

Fine resolution and the fax

machine with which you are

communicating does not support

Super Fine resolution, the machine

transmits using the highest

resolution mode supported by the

other fax machine.

•Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of

gray or photographs.

Darkness You can select the default contrast mode to fax

your originals lighter or darker.

Scan Size Sets the image size.

The scan size options may vary between

document feeder or scanner glass.

Auto Report

You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the

previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.

For further details, see "Printing sent fax report automatically" on page 9.

Copy setup

Changing the copy setup options

For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.

1. Press (Copy) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK.

Stamp RCV Name This option allows the machine to automatically

print the page number, and the date and time of

reception at the bottom of each page of a

received fax.

Rcv Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception

from an extension phone plugged into the EXT

socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up

the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter

the code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.

Auto Reduction When receiving a fax containing pages as long

as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper

tray, the machine can reduce the size of the

original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the

machine.

Turn on this feature if you want to automatically

reduce an incoming page.

With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot

reduce the original to fit onto one page. The

original will be divided and printed in actual size

on two or more pages.

Discard Size When receiving a fax containing pages as long

as or longer than the paper in your machine, you

can set the machine to discard a specific length

from the end of the received fax. The machine

will print the received fax on one or more sheets

of paper, minus the data that would have been

on the specified discard segment.

When the received fax contains pages larger

than the paper in your machine, and Auto

Reduction has been turned on, the machine will

reduce the fax to fit on the existing paper, and

nothing will be discarded.

Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on

your country. Using this feature, the system will

not accept faxes sent from remote stations

whose numbers are stored in the memory as

junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for

blocking any unwanted faxes.

When you turn on this feature, you can access

the following options to set junk fax numbers.

•Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax

numbers.

•Delete: Allows you to delete the desired

junk fax number. If you select Delete All,

Allows you to delete all junk fax numbers.

DRPD Mode This setting may not be available depending on

your country. This mode enables a user to use a

single telephone line to answer several different

telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set

the machine to recognize which ring patterns to

answer. For details about this feature, see

"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 5.

Duplex Print Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the

machine prints the received fax data, it prints

them on both sides of the paper. For details

about this feature, see "Printing received faxes

on both sides of the paper" on page 5.

Option Description

Doc Box Saving This menu only appears when an optional hard

disk drive (HDD) has been installed. With this

feature set to On, allows you to store received

faxes in the common box.

Option Description

Machine status and advanced feature_ 3

4. Press the up/down arrow until the copy setup item you want is

highlighted and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

6. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and

press OK.

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6, as needed.

8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Change default

Option Description

Scan Size Sets the image size.

The scan size options may vary between

document feeder or scanner glass.

# of Copies You can enter the number of copies using the

number keypad.

Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy

job in sets.

Reduce/Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.

Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that

is easier to read, when the original contains faint

markings and dark images.

Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the

document type for the current copy job.

Scan setup

Changing the scan setup options

To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up

default scan settings for each scan type.

1. Press (Scan/Email) on the control panel.

2. Press Menu on the control panel.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK.

4. Press OK when Change Default highlights .

5. Press the up/down until the scan type you want is highlighted and press

OK.

6. Press the up/down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

Setting option is the same for each scan type.

7. Press the up/down arrow until the desired status is highlighted and press

OK.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options.

9. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Option Description

Scan Size Sets the image size.

The scan size options may vary between

document feeder or scanner glass.

Original Type Sets the original document’s type.

Resolution Sets the image resolution.

Scan Color Sets the color mode.

Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be

saved. If you select BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF,

you can select to scan multiple pages.

Depending on the selected scan type, this

option may not appear.

Printing a report

You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Report and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the report or list you want to print

highlights and press OK.

To print all reports and lists, select All Reports.

5. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.

The selected information prints out.

Option Description

Configuration This list shows the status of the user-selectable

options. You may print this list to confirm your

changes after changing settings.

Supplies Info. This item allows you to check how many pages

are printed and how much toner are left in the

cartridge.

Address Book This list shows all of the email addresses

currently stored in the machine’s memory.

Send Report This report shows the fax number, the number of

pages, the elapsed time of the job, the

communication mode, and the communication

results for a particular fax job.

You can set up your machine to automatically

print a transmission confirmation report after

each fax job (See "Sending" on page 1).

Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes and

emails you have recently sent.

You can set the machine to automatically print

this report every 50 communications (See

"Sending" on page 1).

Fax Rcv Report This report shows information on the faxes you

have recently received.

Scheduled Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored

for delayed faxes along with the starting time

and type of each operation.

JunkFax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk

fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or

from this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu

(See "Receiving" on page 1).

Network Info. This list shows information on your machine’s

network connection and configuration.

Option Description

Machine status and advanced feature_ 4

You can also print the machine's status information and browse status

with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Web browser on your

networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When

SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print

information.

Clearing memory

You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Clear Setting and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the item you want to clear highlights and

press OK.

5. Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm clearing.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 to clear another item.

7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or

models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.

Option Description

All Settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and

resets all of your settings to the factory default.

Fax Setup Restores all of the fax options to the factory

default.

Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory

default.

Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory

default.

System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory

default.

Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory

default.

Address Book Clears all of the email address entries stored in

memory.

Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes and emails.

Fax Rcv Report Clears all records of received faxes.

Network

You may set up the network with the machine's display screen. Before doing

that, you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network

protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to

use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the

network.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and

press OK.

5. Repeat steps 3 through 4, as needed.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Option Description

TCP/IP (IPv4) Select appropriate protocol and configure

parameters to use the network environment.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed.

Wirelessa

a.This menu only appears when an optional wireless network interface

has been installed.

Configure the wireless network environments.

Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default

values.

Network Info. This list shows information on your machine’s

network connection and configuration.

Document management

This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive (HDD) has been

installed.

This menu allows you to store the scanned documents in a box, set various

options for stored documents and change the default settings for stored

documents.

•To use this menu, you need to create a box first. Creating and editing

the box can only be done through SyncThru™ Web Service (See

"Box tab" on page 1).

User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are

allowed to use the email function.

PCL Font List You can print the PCL font list.

PS3 Font List You can print the PS3 font list.

Accounting Report This is used only when network authentication in

enabled with SyncThru™ Web Service. Prints

the report of printing out count for each login

user.

Stored JobaThis list shows the current status of stored job

on hard disk drive (HDD).

Completed JobaThe Completed Job page shows the list of

completed print jobs. The list contains up to 50

files from the latest print jobs.

Net Auth Log This is shows users and their IDs who logged in

the domain.

Counter info. You can view the amount of each category that

your machine has printed so far.

Fax Options You can set to print the information of a fax

reports.

a.This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive (HDD) has

been installed.

Option Description Option Description

Machine status and advanced feature_ 5

•Common Box is provided by default.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Document Box and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted

and press OK.

Option Description

Doc Box Feature •Add From Scan: You can store scanned

documents in a box. The stored file will be

named automatically as

"yearmonthdayhourminutesecond".

•Task From Box: You can print a document

from a box.

Doc Box Setup •Add From Scan: You can set the default

options for storing the document to a box.

•Task From Box: You can set the default

options for printing the document from a box.

Doc Box Report You can print a report about documents stored

in a box.

For the document stored in the Secure Box, you can set the

password for accessing the document.

Job management

This menu item is avaidlable when the optional hard disk or memory is

installed

(See "Printing with the optional hard disk" on page 8 or "Printing with the

optional memory (CLX-6250 Series only)" on page 5).

Menu overview

The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine

or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing

Menu.

Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or

models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.

Items Option

Fax Feature Darkness

Resolution

Scan Size

Multi Send

Delay Send

Priority Send

Forward

Secure Receive

Add Page

Cancel Job

Fax Setup Sending

Redial Times

Redial Term

Prefix Dial

ECM Mode

Send Report

Image TCR

Dial Modea

Receiving

Receive Mode

Ring To Answer

Stamp RCV Name

Rcv Start Code

Auto Reduction

Discard Size

Junk Fax Setup

DRPD Modea

Duplex Print

Doc Box Savingb

Change Default

Resolution

Darkness

Scan Size

Auto Report

Copy Feature Scan Size

Reduce/Enlarge

Darkness

Original Type

Layout

Adjust Bkgd

Margin Shift

Edge Erase

Gray Enhance

WaterMark

Machine status and advanced feature_ 6

Copy Setup Change Default

Scan Size

# of Copies

Collation

Reduce/Enlarge

Darkness

Original Type

Scan Feature USB Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Format

Email Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

FTP Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

SMB Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Setup Change Default

USB Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Format

Email Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Format

FTP Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Format

SMB Feature

Scan Size

Original Type

Resolution

Scan Color

Scan Format

Send Report

Items Option

System Setup Machine Setup

Machine ID

Machine Fax No.

Date & Time

Clock Mode

Form Menub

Select Formb

Language

Default Mode

Power Save

Timeout

Job Timeout

Altitude Adjust

Auto Continue

Paper Substitution

Net Accounting

Import Setting

Export Setting

Color Report

Paper Setup

Paper Size

Paper Type

Paper Source

Wide A4

Sound/Volume

Key Sound

Alarm Sound

Speaker

Ringer

Report

All Reports

Configuration

Supplies Info.

Address Book

Send Report

Sent Report

Fax Rcv Report

Scheduled Jobs

JunkFax Report

Network Info.

User Auth List

PCL Font List

PS Font List

Accounting Report

Stored Jobb

Completed Jobb

Net Auth Log

Counter info.

Fax Options

Maintenance

CLR Empty Msgc

Supplies Life

Color

Serial Number

Toner Low Alert

Items Option

Machine status and advanced feature_ 7

System Setup Clear Setting

All Settings

Fax Setup

Copy Setup

Scan Setup

System Setup

Network Setup

Address Book

Sent Report

Fax Rcv Report

Job Managementb

Active Job

Stored Job

File Policy

Image Overwriteb

Immediate

On Demand

Network TCP/IP (IPv4)

DHCP

BOOTP

Static

IP Address

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

TCP/IP (IPv6)

IPv6 Activate

DHCPv6 Config

Ethernet Speed

Auto

10M Half

10M Full

100M Half

100M Full

Wirelessd

WLAN Settings

Wizard

Custom

WLAN Default

WLAN Signal

Clear Setting

Network Info.

Document BoxbDoc Box Feature

Task From Box

Add From Scan

Doc Box Setup

Task From Box

Add From Scan

Doc Box Report

a.This setting may not be available depending on your country.

b.This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive (HDD) has

been installed.

c. This menu only appears when the toner cartridge has almost reached

its estimated cartridge life.

Items Option d.This menu only appears when an optional wireless network interface

has been installed.

Management tools_ 1

1.management tools

This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.

This chapter includes:

•Introducing useful management tools

•Using SyncThru™ Web Service

•Using the Smart Panel program

•Smarthru Office

•Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator

Introducing useful management tools

The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.

•"Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 1.

•"Using the Smart Panel program" on page 2.

•"Smarthru Office" on page 3.

•"Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator" on page 4.

Using SyncThru™ Web Service

Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for

SyncThru™ Web Service.

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP

network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™

Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to:

•View the machine’s device information and check its current status.

•Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.

•Change printer preference.

•Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.

•Get support for using the machine.

To access SyncThru™ Web Service:

1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address

field and press the Enter key or click Go.

2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.

Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service

Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to

log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service

without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and

Security tab.

1.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service

website.

A log-in page appears.

2.Type in the ID and Password then click Login .

If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the

below default ID and password.

•ID: admin

•Password: sec00000

SyncThru™ Web Service overview

Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.

Information tab

This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can

check things, such as the machine’s IP address, remaining amount of

toner, ethernet information, firmware version and more. You can also

print reports such as an error report and so on.

•Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the

machine and their severity.

•Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are printed

and amount of toner left in the cartridge.

•Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by

print types:simplex, duplex.

•Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and

network information.

•Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as

system related reports, e mail address and font reports.

Box tab

This tab only appears when an optional hard disk drive (HDD) is

installed.

You can save PC-printed, faxed, scanned or copied documents in the

User Box or System Box and print the saved documents.

When saving the document using the Add from Scan menu in the

control panel, you can choose the box to save the scanned

document from the below.

•Common Box: This box is provided by default. Received faxes

are stored in this box. Allows you to store received faxes if Doc

Box Saving menu in the control panel is On. You cannot

delete this box.

•Public Box: This box can be created by a user.

•Secure Box: This box is created by a user. You can set the

password for accessing this box.

•User Box: Only received fax and scanned documents will be saved in

this box. Types of boxes provided may differ depending on the

model you are using.

•System Box: You can save the documents from the system.

-Secured Received Fax: Allows you to store received faxes if

Secure Receive menu in the control panel is On.

-Stored Print: Allows you to print documents which you have saved

as Store, Proof or Print Schedule in the printer driver’s Job

Setting option.

-Secured Print: Allows you to print documents which you have

saved as Confidential in the printer driver’s Job Setting option.

Management tools_ 2

Address Book tab

You can store contact information such as name, speed no, e-mail

address and so on. For grouping individual addresses, Fax Group entry

and E-mail Group entry are ready.

•Individual: You can create an individual address book. Click the Add

button.

•Fax Groups: You can create fax group address books. You can add

users by clicking the Add button or by dragging the user from

Individual group to Fax Groups.

•E-mail Groups: You can create e-mail group address books. You can

add users by clicking the Add button or by dragging the user from

Individual group to E-mail Groups.

Setting tab

This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and

network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.

•Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by

your machine.

-System: You can set settings related to your machine.

-Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs.

-Copy: You can set settings related to copying jobs.

-Fax: You can set settings related to faxing jobs.

-Scan: You can set settings related to scanning jobs.

-E-mail Notification: You can set e-mail notification feature and

e-mail address of recipients who will receive the notification.

•Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the

network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network

protocols and so on.

-SNMP: You can exchange of management information between

network devices using SNMP.

-Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP): You can set the outgoing E-mail

server.

-Restore Default: You can restore default network settings.

Security tab

This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You

need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.

•System Security: You can set the system administrator’s information

and also enable or disable machine features.

•Network Security: You can set settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6

filtering, 802.1x, Authentication servers.

•User Access Control: You can set configurations for user

accessibility.

Maintenance tab

This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmwares

and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect

to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.

•Firmware Update: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware.

•Contact Information: You can view the contact information.

•Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download

orcheck information.

E-mail notification setup

You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option.

By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and

SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or

machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This

option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.

1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address

field and press the Enter key or click Go.

2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.

3. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.

If you haven’t configured outgoing server environment, go to

Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to

configure network environment before setting e-mail notification.

4. Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.

Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items

you want to receive an alert for.

5. Click Apply.

If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In

that case, contact the a network administrator.

Setting the system administrator information

Set the the system administrator information. This setting is necessary for

using the e-mail notification option.

1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address

field and press the Enter key or click Go.

2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.

3. From the Security tab, select System Security > System

Administrator

4. Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location and E-mail

address.

5. Click Apply.

Using the Smart Panel program

Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine

status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows

and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the

machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from

Samsung website and install (See "Installing the SmartPanel" on page 5).

To use this program, you need the following system requirements:

•Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with

your machine (See "System requirements" on page 2).

•Mac OS X 10.3 or higher.

•Linux. Check for Linux systems that are compatible with your

machine (See "System requirements" on page 2).

•Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML

Help.

Understanding Smart Panel

If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Smart

Panel.

You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel

icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux).

You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).

Windows Double-click this icon in Windows.

Macintosh Click this icon in Mac OS X.

Linux Click this icon in Linux.

Management tools_ 3

Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select

Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your machine name >

Smart Panel.

•If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine, first

select the correct machine model you want in order to access the

corresponding Smart Panel.

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart

Panel icon and select your machine.

•The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide

may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.

The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the

estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various

other types of information. You can also change settings.

1

Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner

cartridge(s). The machine and the number of toner

cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ

depending on the machine in use. Some machines

do not have this feature.

2Buy Now Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.

3

User’s Guide View User’s Guide.

This button changes to Troubleshooting

Guide when error occurs. You can directly

open troubleshooting section in the user’s

guide.

4

Printer

Setting

Configure various machine settings in the Printer

Settings Utility window. Some machines do not

have this feature.

If you connect your machine to a network,

the SyncThru™ Web Service window

appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility

window.

5

Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the

Printing Preferences window. This feature is

available only for Windows (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel

icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options

window.

Smarthru Office

The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru Office. SmarThru

Office offers you convenient features to use with your machine.

Starting SmarThru Office

Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:

1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly

connected to each other.

2. Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the SmarThru

Office icon on your desktop.

3. Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.

This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct

buttons include: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR,

Fix and Enhance and Samsung Website. You can disable this

menu by checking “Do not show this diaglog again”.

4. The SmarThru Office appears.

For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help > SmarThru

Office help. The SmarThru Office Help window appears; you can view

on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.

Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar

to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.

Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office.

Before you begin the uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed

on your computer.

a)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.

b)Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru

Office.

c)When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the

statement and click OK.

d)Click Finish.

Using SmarThru Office

Scanning

1.Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar to

activate the SmarThru Office launcher.

2.Click the scanning icon to open the scanning window.

Management tools_ 4

3.Scan Setting window opens.

1Select

Scanner

Allows you to select between the Local or Network

scanner.

2Select

Profile

Allows you to save settings frequently used for

future use. Click New Profile to save the setting.

3Scan

Settings

Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size

and Paper Source.

4Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name

and location to send scanned data.

Click Advanced button to set more scan options.

4.Set scan settings and click Scan.

Printing

1.Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to

active the SmarThru Office launcher.

2.Click the printing icon to open the printing window.

3.Select the file you want to print.

4.Select the machine you want to use for printing.

5.Click Print to start the job.

Sending a file via fax

You can fax while working on SmarThru Office.

1.Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to

active the SmarThru Office launcher.

2.Click the faxing icon to open the faxing window.

3.Set fax settings and click Send Fax.

•Select Fax Machine: Choose whether the machine is connected

locally or via network. If the machine is in network, click Browse

to insert the IP address and other information.

•Pages Ready: Select file you want to fax. Click Add.

•Recipients: Click Add to enter the fax number.

•Cover page: If you need a cover page, enter the values for the

options. If not, click Skip Cover Page.

•Fax Settings: If the original document is faded or not vivid, click

Fine. In this case, the fax speed could be low.

Sending a file to FTP

You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru

Office.

1.Double-click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.

2.Select the file to send to FTP.

3.Select File > Send to > Send By FTP.

4.Send By FTP window opens.

5.Add your file and click Upload.

Email

You can send email while working on SmarThru Office.

You need an email client program, such as Outlook Express, to

send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for sending email may

differ depending on email client program you are using.

1.Double-click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.

2.Select the file to send to Email.

3.Select File > Send to> Send By E-mail.

4.An email client opens.

5.Type in necessary information and send your email.

Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator

Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring

machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified

Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Linux Unified Driver" on page 5).

After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver

Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.

Opening the Unified Driver Configurator

1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.

You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified

Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.

2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration

window.

1Printers

Configuration

2Scanners

Configuration

3Ports

Configuration

To use the on screen help, click Help.

3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver

Configurator.

Management tools_ 5

Printers configuration

Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.

Printers tab

View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the

machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator

window.

1Switches to Printers configuration.

2Shows all of the installed machine.

3Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.

The printer control buttons are, as follows:

•Refresh: Renews the available machines list.

•Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.

•Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.

•Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default

machine.

•Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.

•Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working

properly.

•Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.

Classes tab

The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.

1Shows all of the machine classes.

2Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the

class.

•Refresh: Renews the classes list.

•Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.

•Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.

Scanners configuration

In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of

installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties and scan

images.

1Switches to Scanners configuration.

2Shows all of the installed scanners.

3Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.

Management tools_ 6

•Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a

document.

Ports configuration

In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of

each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner

has terminated the job for any reason.

1Switches to Ports configuration.

2Shows all of the available ports.

3Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.

•Refresh: Renews the available ports list.

•Release port: Releases the selected port.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners

Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port

or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device

(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of

“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.

The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing

mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The

drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current

status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration.

The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of

the machine device, while another block is in use.

When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly

recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver

Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the

new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for

machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being

chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied

by default.

Maintenance_ 1

1.maintenance

This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.

This chapter includes:

•Printing a machine report

•Monitoring the supplies life

•Adjusting the color contrast

•Finding the serial number

•Using Toner Low Alert

•Cleaning a machine

•Storing the toner cartridge

•Tips for moving & storing your machine

Printing a machine report

You can print the machine's information and job report.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Report and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow until the report or list you want to print appears

and press OK.

To print all reports and lists, select All Reports.

5. Press the left/right arrow to highlight Yes at the Printing? prompt and

press OK.

You can use SyncThru™ Web Service to print the machine's

configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in the

networked computer and type the machine's IP address. When

SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print

Information Sheet.

Monitoring the supplies life

To view the supply life indicators, follow the steps below:

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.

4. Press up/down arrow to highlight Supplies Life and press OK.

5. The display shows options as you press up/down arrow.

6. When you select the option, press OK to browse the life.

Adjusting the color contrast

Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.

4. Press up/down arrow to highlight Color and press OK.

5. The display shows options as you press up/down arrow.

Option Description

Custom Color This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by

color.

•Default: Optimizes colors automatically.

•Manual Adjust: Allows you to manually

adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.

It is recommended to use the Default setting for

best color quality.

Auto Color Reg. You can adjust the position of color texts or

graphics to match the position of the printed

colors to those on your screen.

If you have moved the machine, it is

strongly recommended to operate this

menu manually.

Density Controla

a.CLX-6250 Series only.

The machine automatically calibrates the toner

density of machine for the best possible color

print quality.

If you select Off, the machine is calibrated by

the factory default toner density.

Density AdjustmentaThis item allows you to quickly adjust color

density. You can easily adjust the color density

and see the result right away but it’s not a

permenant adjustment. Use this item to get a

quick result.

Density SensingaAutomatically calculates the reduced or worn out

supplies like toner or machine parts and uses

this information to adjust the color density. For

example, if the yellow toner is running out, the

machine calculates the amount of remaining

yellow toner and adjusts color density so the

printouts are fine.

Density CalibrationaYou can manually calibrate the toner density of

machine for the best possible color print quality.

Finding the serial number

When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, the

machine’s serial number by taking the following steps:

Maintenance_ 2

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Serial Number and press OK.

5. Check your machine’s serial number.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Using Toner Low Alert

If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing user to change the

toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for this message to appear

or not.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.

4. Press up/down arrow to highlight Toner Low Alert and press OK.

Cleaning a machine

If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty

environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best

printing condition and use your machine longer.

•Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials

containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong

substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.

•If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner,

we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with water to

clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and

might be harmful to you.

Cleaning the outside

Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth

slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the

machine.

Cleaning the inside

During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate

inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as

toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and

reduces these problems.

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to

cool down.

2. Using the handle, completely open the front door.

3. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.

Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine do

not touch surface of belt.

When you open the front door and work inside the machine, it is

highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.

Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer

belt.

4. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull the cartridge out.

If you open the front door, be careful not to touch the underneath

the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The temperature

of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your

skin.

Maintenance_ 3

5. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the

toner cartridge area.

While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage

the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents

such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can

occur and cause damage to the machine.

6. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and using a

cotton swab, gently clean the 4 pieces of LSU glass.

7. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine.

8. Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, align it with the slots on

the inside of the front door.

9. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and

firmly seated.

10. Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

11. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.

Cleaning the scan unit

Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We

suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the

day, as needed.

1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2. Open the scanner lid.

3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass

until it is clean and dry.

1Scanner lid

2Scanner glass

3Document feeder

glass

4White bar

Maintenance_ 4

4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean

and dry.

5. Close the scanner lid.

Storing the toner cartridge

Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature

and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations below

to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality and longest life from

your new Samsung toner cartridges.

Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;

this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The

toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until

installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of

the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.

Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful

shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is

removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:

•Inside the protective bag from the original package.

•Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if

they were installed in the machine.

•Do not store consumables in;

-Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).

-Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%.

-An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

-Direct sunlight or room light.

-Dusty places.

-A car for a long period of time.

-An environment where corrosive gases are present.

-An environment with salty air.

Handling instructions

•Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.

•Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.

•Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this

can cause internal damage and toner spillage.

Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge

Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of

non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store

brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.

Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine

caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung

brand toner cartridge.

Estimated cartridge life

Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the

amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may

vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating

environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,

if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you

may need to change the cartridge more often.

Tips for moving & storing your machine

•When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise,

the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can

cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.

•When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding

the machine securely.

•When moving the machine or when machine is not in use for a long time,

lock the scanner lock.

Troubleshooting_ 1

1.troubleshooting

This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.

This chapter includes:

•Redistributing toner

•Clearing original document jams

•Tips for avoiding paper jams

•Clearing paper jams

•Understanding display messages

•Solving other problems

Redistributing toner

When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:

•White streaks or light printing occurs.

•The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on

the display.

•The Status LED blinks red.

If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing

the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light

printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.

1. Using the handle, completely open the front door.

2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull the cartridge out.

If you open the front door, be careful not to touch the underneath

the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The temperature

of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your

skin.

When you open the front door and work inside the machine, it is

highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.

Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer

belt.

3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side

to side to redistribute the toner.

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash

clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into

the opening in the machine.

Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the

machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into

Troubleshooting_ 2

place completely.

5. Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Clearing original document jams

When an original jams while passing through the document feeder, a

warning message appears on the display screen.

To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly

and gently.

To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or

mixed paper-type originals.

Input misfeed

1. Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.

2. Open the document feeder cover.

3. Gently remove the original jammed from the document feeder.

4. Close the document feeder cover. Reload the pages you removed, if

any, in the document feeder.

Exit misfeed

1. Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.

2. Remove the misfeed original, and remove the sheets from the document

output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

3. Load the removed pages back into the document feeder.

Roller misfeed

1. Open the scanner lid.

2. Remove the misfeed original, and remove the sheets from the feed area

by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

1scanner lid

Troubleshooting_ 3

3. Close the scanner lid. Load the removed pages back into the document

feeder.

Tips for avoiding paper jams

By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.

When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines.

•Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (See "Loading

paper in the tray" on page 3).

Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper

capacity mark on the inside of the tray.

•Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.

•Flex, fan and straighten paper before loading.

•Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.

•Do not mix paper types in a tray.

•Use only recommended print media (See "Setting the paper size and

type" on page 7).

•Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the

tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.

Clearing paper jams

When a paper jam occurs, a warning message appears on the display

screen.

To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and

gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the

jam.

In tray 1

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically

ejected from the machine.

If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.

2. Pull out tray 1 .

3. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid

tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge (See "Inside

the machine" on page 4).

4. Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing

automatically resumes.

In optional tray 2

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

Troubleshooting_ 4

1. Pull out optional tray 2.

2. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid

tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper

in this area, stop and go to the next step.

3. Pull tray 1 half-way out.

4. If you see the jammed paper, remove the paper from the machine by

gently pulling it straight out.

5. Insert the trays back into the machine. Printing automatically resumes.

In the multi-purpose tray

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.

If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance

removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.

2. Close the multi-purpose tray.

3. Pull the tray out.

4. Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands.

5. Pull the paper out gently.

6. Replace the tray.

7. Open and close the front door to resume printing.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Inside the machine

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the

machine.

1. Using the handle, completely open the front door.

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.

Troubleshooting_ 5

2. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.

Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.

3. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid

tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

4. Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, align it with the slots on

the inside of the front door.

5. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and

firmly seated.

6. Close the front door to resume printing.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

In exit area

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically

ejected from the machine.

If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.

2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.

If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when

you pull, stop and go to the next step.

Troubleshooting_ 6

3. Open the scan unit.

When the scanner lid is open, the scan unit cannot be opened. Do

not force the scan unit open, it can cause damage to the machine.

Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit.

4. Open the fuser cover.

5. Open the inner cover.

Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could

cause burns!

6. Pull up the paper jam lever in the direction of the arrow to separate the

fuser rollers and carefully remove the jammed paper from the unit.

7. Press down the paper jam lever to reapply pressure to the rollers.

8. Close the inner cover.

Before closing the inner cover, the jam lever must be fastened first

(step7). Otherwise, paper jam can occur.

If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when

you pull, stop and go to the next step.

9. Open the inner cover of reverse unit and carefully remove the jammed

paper out of the machine.

If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up

jammed paper, stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as

Troubleshooting_ 7

shown to remove the misfed paper.

10. Close the inner cover of the reverse unit.

11. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely

closed. Make sure that it is securely latched.

Be careful not to pinch your fingers!

If the scan unit is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when

you pull, stop and go to the next step.

12. Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the

machine.

13. Close the rear cover.

In the duplex unit area

Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.

1. Open the front door.

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.

2. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.

Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.

3. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid

tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

Troubleshooting_ 8

4. Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, align it with the slots on

the inside of the front door.

5. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and

firmly seated.

6. Close the front door to resume printing.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Understanding display messages

Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s

status or errors. Some error messages are shown with graphics to aid you in

troubleshooting.

Checking display messages

1. When errors occur, Check Error appears on the display and press OK.

2. Check the display message to see what kind of error has occurred.

If several messages appear, press the up/down arrow to highlight the

message you want solve.

3. Press OK on the control panel.

Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their

meaning, and solve the problem, using the suggested solutions.

•If Check Error still appears, repeat above steps.

•If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing

job again. If the problem persists, call for service.

•When you call for service, provide the service representative with the

contents of display message and the serial number.

•Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options

or models.

•[aaa] indicates the error code. When you contact the service center,

this error code help to handle the problem.

•[ccc] indicates the part of the each toner cartridge.

•[xxx] indicates the media type.

•[zzz] indicates the paper size.

•[yyy] indicates the tray.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

[ccc] toner cart.

error

Error: [aaa]

Open/Close Door

The toner cartridge is

wrong installed.

Open and close the

front door; and check

that the toner cartridge’s

are installed correctly. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Prepare new [ccc]

toner

Prepare new [ccc]

toner cartridge

Small amount of toner is

left in the cartridge. The

estimated cartridge life of

toner is close.

Prepare a new cartridge

for replacement. You

may temporarily

increase the printing

quality by redistributing

the toner (See

"Redistributing toner" on

page 1).

Troubleshooting_ 9

Replace new [ccc]

toner

Replace with new

[ccc] toner cartridge

The indicated toner

cartridge has almost

reached its estimated

cartridge life. The

machine might stop

printing.

Estimated cartridge

life means the

expected or

estimated toner

cartridge life, which

indicates the

average capacity of

print-outs and is

designed pursuant

to ISO/IEC 19798.

The number of

pages may be

affected by the

percentage of

image area,

operating

environment,

printing interval,

media type and

media size. Some

amount of toner

may remain in the

cartridge even

when red LED is

turns on and the

printer stops

printing.

•You can choose Stop

or Continue as

shown on the control

panel. If you select

Stop, the printer

stops printing and

you cannot print any

more without

changing the

cartridge. If you

select Continue, the

printer keeps printing

but the printing

quality cannot be

guaranteed.

Replace the toner

cartridge for the best

print quality when this

message appears.

Using a cartridge

beyond this stage

can result in printing

quality issues. (See

"Replacing the toner

cartridge" on page 2)

Samsung does

not recommend

using

non-genuine

Samsung toner

cartridge such

as refilled or

remanufactured

. Samsung

cannot

guarantee

non-genuine

Samsung toner

cartridge's

quality. Service

or repair

required as a

result of using

non-genuine

Samsung toner

cartridges will

not be covered

under the

machine

warranty.

•If the machine stops

printing, replace the

toner cartridge (See

"Replacing the toner

cartridge" on page 2).

[ccc] toner Not

Compatible

[ccc] toner cartridge

is not compatible.

Check guide

The toner cartridge you

have installed is not for

your machine.

Install a

Samsung-genuine toner

cartridge, designed for

your machine.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

[ccc] toner Not

Installed

[ccc] toner cartridge

is not installed.

Install it

The toner cartridge is not

installed or the CRUM

(Consumer Replaceable

Unit Monitor) in the

cartridge is not properly

connected.

Reinstall the toner

cartridge two or three

times. If the problem

persists, the toner

cartridge is not being

detected. Call for

service.

[ccc] Toner Not

Installed

[ccc] Toner is not

installed.

Remove seal tape &

reinstall

The machine cannot

detect a toner cartridge.

Remove the sealing

tape from the toner

cartridge.

Refer to Quick Install

Guide.

Group

Not Available

You have tried to select a

group location number

where only a single

location number can be

used, such as when

adding locations for a

multiple send operation.

Use a speed dial

number or dial number

manually using the

number keypad.

Data Read Fail

Check USB Memory

Time expired while

reading date.

Try again.

Data Write Fail

Check USB Memory

Storing to the USB

memory failed.

Check the available

USB memory space.

Door is open.

Close it

The door is not securely

latched.

Close the door until it

locks into place.

Door is open or

Check Transfer belt

The front door is not

securely latched.

Close the front door

until it locks into place.

IP Conflict

This IP address

conflicts with that

of other system

The IP address is used

elsewhere.

Check the IP address or

obtain a new IP

address.

Connection Error Connection with the

SMTP server failed.

Check the server

settings and the

network cable.

Enter Again You entered an

unavailable item.

Enter the correct item

again.

Fax memory is

almost full

The fax memory is full. Delete unnecessary fax

jobs and retransmit after

more memory becomes

available. Alternatively,

split the transmission

into more than one

operation.

Fan error

Error: [aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

machine.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Fuser error

Error: [aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

machine.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Fuser unit Not

Installed

Fuser unit is not

installed.

Install it

The fuser unit is not

installed.

Call for service.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 10

Paper Empty in

[yyy]

Paper is empty

in [yyy].

Load paper

There is no paper in the

tray.

Load paper in the tray

(See "Loading paper in

the tray" on page 3).

Jam bottom of

duplex

Paper has jammed

during duplex printing.

Clear the jam (See "In

the duplex unit area" on

page 7).

Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in exit

area.

Clear the jam (See "In

exit area" on page 5).

Jam inside machine Paper has jammed

inside the machine.

Clear the jam (See

"Inside the machine" on

page 4).

Jam inside of

duplex

Paper has jammed

during duplex printing.

Clear the jam (See "In

the duplex unit area" on

page 7).

Jam top of duplex Paper has jammed

during duplex printing.

Clear the jam (See "In

the duplex unit area" on

page 7).

Junk Fax Error

Junk Fax Job

Cancelled

The machine has

received a fax from

which is registered as a

junk fax.

The received fax data

will be deleted.

Reconfirm junk fax

setup (See "Receiving"

on page 1).

Line Busy

The line is already

engaged.

Try Again Later

The receiving fax

machine did not answer

or the line is already

engaged.

Try again after a few

minutes.

Line Error

The Fax Line has a

problem.

Try Again Later

Your machine cannot

connect with the

receiving fax machine or

has lost contact because

of a problem with the

phone line.

Try again. If the problem

persists, wait an hour or

so for the line to clear

again. Or, turn the ECM

mode on (See

"Sending" on page 1.)

LSU error

Error: [aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

machine.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Memory Full

Cancel | Start

The memory is full. Press the left/right

arrow to highlight

Cancel or Start, then

press OK. If you select

Cancel , the machine

stops the fax job. If you

select Start, the

machine only sends

scanned documents of

the fax job.

Memory Full

Divide the job

The memory is full. Split the transmission

into more than one

operation.

Memory Full

Fax memory is full.

Print or remove

received fax job

The memory is full. Print or remove the

received fax data in the

memory.

Motor Error

Error: [aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

machine.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Network Error

There is a problem

with the network.

There is a problem with

the network.

Check the network. If

the problem persists,

ask the system

administrator or the

person who has set up

your local network.

No Answer

The remote fax

machine has not

answered

The remote fax machine

has not answered after

several redial attempts.

Try again. Verify the

number to ensure that a

fax can be received.

Not proper room

temperature.

Change room

temperature

The machine is in a room

with improper room

temperature.

Move the machine to a

room with proper room

temperature (See

"Environmental

specifications" on

page 1).

No Such Job You are performing an

Add Pages or Cancel

Job operation, but there

are no jobs waiting.

Check the display to

see if there are any

scheduled jobs. The

display should indicate

if any scheduled jobs

are in Standby mode,

for example, Delay Fax.

Network problem

Network cable is

not connected.

Check it.

The machine is not

connected with a

network cable.

Connect the machine to

the network with a

network cable.

Network problem

Network card is

not installed.

Check it.

There is a problem on

the network interface.

Turn the power switch

off and on. If the

problem persists, call

for service.

Original paper Jam

Original paper Jam

inside of scanner.

Remove Jam

The load original has

jammed in the document

feeder.

Clear the jam (See

"Clearing original

document jams" on

page 2).

Original paper Jam

Original paper is too

long for scanner.

Check size

The original is too long

for scanner.

Check the originals

(See "Preparing

originals" on page 1).

Output Bin Full

Output Bin Full

Remove printed

paper

The document output

tray is full.

The document output

tray can hold up to 160

sheets of plain paper.

Once the paper is

removed from the

document output tray,

the printer resumes

printing.

Paper Jam in MP Paper has jammed in the

multi-purpose tray area.

Clear the jam (See "In

the multi-purpose tray"

on page 4).

Paper Jam in tray1 Paper has jammed in the

tray1 area.

Clear the jam (See "In

tray 1" on page 3).

Paper Jam in tray2 Paper has jammed in the

tray2 area.

Clear the jam (See "In

optional tray 2" on

page 3).

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 11

Paper Empty in

[yyy]

Paper is empty in

[yyy]

Load paper

There is no paper in

the tray.

Load paper in the tray

(See "Loading paper in

the tray" on page 3).

Paper Mismatch

[yyy]

Load [zzz][xxx]

Continue Cancel

The paper size

specified in the printer

properties does not

match the paper you

are loading.

You can select the

option between

Continue or Cancel. If

you select Cancel , the

printing job will stop.

Load the correct paper

in the tray. If you select

Continue, printing job

will continue.

BOOTP problem

BOOTP has a

problem. Switching

to Auto IP

There is a problem with

the network.

Check your network

environment, or contact

your network

administrator.

DHCP problem

DHCP has a

problem.

Reconfigure

BOOTP/static IP

There is a problem with

the network.

Check your network

environment, or contact

your network

administrator.

DHCP problem

DHCP has a

problem. Switching

to Auto IP

There is a problem with

the network.

Check your network

environment, or contact

your network

administrator.

BOOTP problem

BOOTP has a

problem.

Reconfigure

DHCP/static IP

There is a problem with

the network.

Check your network

environment, or contact

your network

administrator.

Replace [ccc] toner

Replace with new

[ccc] Toner

The toner cartridge has

reached the end of its

lifespan.

Replace the toner

cartridge with a

Samsung-genuine toner

cartridge (See

"Replacing the toner

cartridge" on page 2).

Replace Fuser unit

Replace with new

fuser unit

The fuser unit has

reached the end of its

lifespan.

This message appears

when the fuser unit is

worn. Replace the fuser

unit with a new one. Call

for service.

Retry Redial? The machine is

waiting for a specified

time interval to redial

a previously busy

station.

You can press OK to

immediately redial,

Stop/Clear to cancel

the redial operation.

Scanner door Open

Door of scanner is

open.

Close it

The scanner door is not

securely latched.

Close the scanner door

until it locks into place.

Scanner locked

Scanner locking

switch is locked.

Release it

The scanner module is

locked.

Unlock the CCD (See

"Front view" on page 1).

Or turn off the machine

and on again. If the

problem persists, call

for service.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Self Diagnostics

Please Wait...

The engine in your

printer is performing self

diagnostics.

Please wait a few

minutes.

Send Error

There is a problem

in DNS

There is a problem in

DNS.

Configure the DNS

setting.

Send Error

There is a problem

in POP3

There is a problem in

POP3.

Configure the POP3

setting.

Send Error

There is a problem

in SMTP

There is a problem in

SMTP.

Change to the available

server.

Send Error

There is a problem

in SMTP

authentication

There is a problem in

SMTP authentication.

Configure the

authentication setting.

Send Error

There is a problem

on the NIC Card

There is a problem on

network interface card.

Turn the power switch

off and on. If the

problem persists, call

for service.

Sensor Failure

[aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

sensor signal.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Mail Size Error

Mail exceeds than

server support

The mail size is larger

than the supported size

by SMTP server.

Divide your mail or

reduce the resolution.

System error

Error: [aaa]

Turn off then on

There is a problem in the

machine.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Mail Size Error

One Page is

Too Large

Single page data

exceeds the configured

mail size.

Reduce the resolution

and try again.

Too many Faxes

Too may faxes are

received. Print or

remove job

Too many faxes are

received.

Print or remove

received fax.

Too many Faxes

Too may faxes are

queued. Wait or

remove job

Too many faxes are

queued to be sent.

Cancel reserved fax in

priority fax feature.

TR belt Not installed

Transfer belt unit is

not installed.

Install it

The transfer belt is not

installed.

Install a

Samsung-genuine

transfer belt.

TR. belt Not

compatible

Transfer belt unit is

not compatible.

Check guide

The transfer belt of the

machine is not for your

machine.

Install the a

Samsung-genuine part

designed for your

machine.

Transfer belt is low

Transfer belt unit

will be worn.

Order new one

The life of the transfer

belt will expired soon.

Order a transfer belt

(See "Available

accessories" on

page 2).

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 12

Solving other problems

The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the

recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is

corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.

Power problems

Click this link to open an animation about power problems.

Replace TR. Belt

Replace with new

Transfer belt unit

The life of the transfer

belt has expired.

Replace the transfer

belt with a new one.

Install a

Samsung-genuine

transfer belt.

Tray[yyy] cassette

Out

Tray[yyy] cassette

is pulled out.

Insert it properly

The tray is not properly

closed.

To close the tray, lower

the rear edge, align it

with the slot, and slide it

into the printer.

Tray[yyy] has a

problem

Communication

problem occurred

with tray[yyy]

The machine cannot

communicate with the

optional tray .

Reinstall the optional

tray. If the problem

persists, call for service.

Tray[yyy] Not

Installed

Tray[yyy] is not

installed. Install it

The optional tray is not

installed.

Reinstall the optional

tray. If the problem

persists, call for service.

Tray2 has a problem

Communication

problem occurred

with Tray2

The machine cannot

communicate with the

optional tray 2.

Check the cable

connecting the machine

and the optional tray 2.

If the problem persists,

call for service.

Tray2 Not installed

Tray2 is not

installed. Install it

The optional tray2 is not

installed.

Install the optional tray

2. If the optional tray 2 is

installed, check the

cable connecting the

machine and the

optional tray 2. If the

problem persists, call

for service.

Updating Data

Please Wait...

•The machine is

updating data.

•This message can

also appear when

printing on paper

smaller than A4, such

as envelope or B5. In

this case, the machine

is adjusting the

settings for best print

results.

Wait a few minutes.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Condition Suggested solutions

The machine is

not receiving

power;

or the printer

cable connection

between the

computer and the

machine is not

connected

properly.

•Plug in the power cord and then press the power

switch to turn the machine on.

Or press (power) on the control panel.

•Disconnect the machine printer cable and

reconnect it.

-For Local USB

-For Network Printing

Troubleshooting_ 13

Paper feeding problems

Condition Suggested solutions

Paper jams during

printing.

Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams"

on page 3).

Paper sticks

together.

•Check the maximum paper capacity of the

tray (See "Print media specifications" on

page 3).

•Make sure that you are using the correct type

of paper (See "Print media specifications" on

page 3).

•Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan

the paper.

•Humid conditions may cause some paper to

stick together, install paper from a fresh ream.

Multiple sheets of

paper do not feed.

Different types of paper may be stacked in the

tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and

weight.

Paper does not feed

into the machine.

•Remove any obstructions from inside the

machine.

•Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove

paper from the tray and reload it correctly.

•There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray.

•The paper is too thick. Use only paper that

meets the specifications required by the

machine (See "Print media specifications" on

page 3).

•If an original does not feed into the machine,

the document feeder rubber pad may require

to be replaced. Contact a service

representative.

The paper keeps

jamming.

•There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray. If you are printing

on special materials, use the multi-purpose

tray.

•An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use

only paper that meets the specifications

required by the machine (See "Print media

specifications" on page 3).

•There may be debris inside the machine.

Open the front door and remove any debris.

•If an original does not feed into the machine,

the document feeder rubber pad may need to

be replaced. Contact a service representative.

Envelopes skew or

fail to feed correctly.

Ensure that the paper guides are against both

sides of the envelopes.

Troubleshooting_ 14

Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions

The machine

does not print.

The machine is not

receiving power.

Check the power cord

connections. Check both

power switches and the

power source.

The machine is not

selected from the

available printers

list.

Select this printers “Name”

from the available printers

drop-down list in the

application you are printing

from

Check the machine for the following:

•The front door is not closed. Close the front

door.

•Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See

"Clearing paper jams" on page 3).

•No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading

paper in the tray" on page 3).

•The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the

toner cartridge.

If a system error occurs, contact your service

representative.

The connection

printer cable

between the

computer and the

machine is not

connected properly.

Disconnect the machine

printer cable and reconnect

it.

The connection

printer cable

between the

computer and the

machine is

defective.

If possible, attach the printer

cable to another computer

that is working properly and

print a job. You can also try

using a different machine

printer cable.

The port setting is

incorrect.

Check the Windows printer

settings to make sure that

the print job is sent to the

correct port. If the computer

has more than one port,

make sure that the machine

is attached to the correct

one.

The machine may

be configured

incorrectly.

Check the Printing

Preferences to ensure that

all of the print settings are

correct (See "Opening

printing preferences" on

page 2).

The printer driver

may be incorrectly

installed.

Repair the machine software

(See "Installing USB

connected machine’s driver"

on page 3).

The machine is

malfunctioning.

Check the display message

on the control panel to see if

the machine is indicating a

system error. Contact a

service representative.

Troubleshooting_ 15

The document size

is so big that the

hard disk space of

the computer is

insufficient to

access the print job.

Make available more hard

disk space and print the

document again.

The machine

selects print

materials from

the wrong paper

source.

The paper option

that was selected in

the Printing

Preferences may

be incorrect.

For many software

applications, the paper

source selection is found

under the Paper tab within

the Printing Preferences.

Select the correct paper

source. See the printer

driver help screen (See

"Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

A print job is

extremely slow.

The job may be

very complex.

Reduce the complexity of

the page or try adjusting the

print quality settings.

Half the page is

blank.

The page

orientation setting

may be incorrect.

Change the page orientation

in your application. See the

printer driver help screen.

The paper size and

the paper size

settings do not

match.

Ensure that the paper size in

the printer driver settings

matches the paper in the

tray.

Or, ensure that the paper

size in the printer driver

settings matches the paper

selection in the software

application settings you use.

Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions

The machine

prints, but the

text is wrong,

garbled, or

incomplete.

The machine cable

is loose or

defective.

Disconnect the machine

printer cable and reconnect.

Try a print job that you have

already printed successfully.

If possible, attach the printer

cable and the machine to

another computer that you

know works ensure print

driver is installed and try a

print job. Finally, try a new

machine printer cable.

The wrong printer

driver was selected.

Check the application’s

printer selection menu to

ensure that your machine is

selected.

The software

application is

malfunctioning.

Try printing a job from

another application.

The operating

system is

malfunctioning.

Exit Windows and reboot the

computer. Turn the machine

off and back on again.

If you are in a DOS

environment, the

font setting for your

machine may be

set incorrectly.

Change the language

setting (See "Changing the

display language" on

page 1).

Printer driver

corrupted.

Reinstall printer drvier.

Pages print, but

they are blank.

The toner cartridge

is defective or out of

toner.

Redistribute the toner, if

necessary.

If necessary, replace the

toner cartridge.

The file may have

blank pages.

Check the file to ensure that

it does not contain blank

pages.

Some parts, such

as the controller or

the board, may be

defective.

Contact a service

representative.

The machine

does not print

PDF files

correctly. Some

parts of graphics,

text, or

illustrations are

missing.

Incompatibility

between the PDF

file and the Acrobat

products.

Printing the PDF file as an

image may enable the file to

print. Turn on Print As

Image from the Acrobat

printing options.

It will take longer to

print when you print a

PDF file as an image.

Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 16

Printing quality problems

If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,

there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the

problem.

The print quality

of photos is not

good. Images are

not clear.

The resolution of

the photo is very

low.

Reduce the photo size. If

you increase the photo size

in the software application,

the resolution will be

reduced.

Before printing,

the machine

emits vapor near

the output tray.

Using damp paper

can cause vapor

during printing.

This is not a problem. Just

keep printing.

The machine

does not print

special- sized

paper, such as

billing paper.

Paper size and

paper size setting

do not match.

Set the correct paper size in

the Paper tab in the

Printing Preferences (See

"Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

Condition Suggested Solutions

Light or faded print •If a vertical white streak or faded area

appears on the page, the toner supply is low.

You may be able to temporarily extend the

toner cartridge life (See"Redistributing toner"

on page 1). If this does not improve the print

quality, install a new toner cartridge.

•The paper may not meet paper specifications;

for example, the paper may be too moist or

rough (See "Print media specifications" on

page 3).

•If the entire page is light, the print resolution

setting is too low or the toner save mode is

on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the

toner save mode off. See the help screen of

the printer driver.

•A combination of faded or smeared defects

may indicate that the toner cartridge needs

cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on

page 2).

•The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty (See "Cleaning the

inside" on page 2).

Toner specks •The paper may not meet specifications; for

example, the paper may be too moist or rough

(See "Print media specifications" on page 3).

•The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the

inside of your machine. Contact a service

representative.

•The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a

service representative.

Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions

Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur

randomly on the page:

•A single sheet of paper may be defective.

Try reprinting the job.

•The moisture content of the paper is uneven

or the paper has moist spots on its surface.

Try a different brand of paper (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing

processes can cause some areas to reject

toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.

•Change the printer option and try again. Go

to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,

and set type to Thick (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

•If these steps do not correct the problem,

contact a service representative.

White Spots If white spots appear on the page:

•The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a

paper falls to the inner devices within the

machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.

Clean the inside of your machine (See

"Cleaning the inside" on page 2).

•The paper path may need cleaning (See

"Cleaning the inside" on page 2).

Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:

•The surface (drum part) of the toner

cartridge inside the machine has probably

been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge

and install a new one (See "Replacing the

toner cartridge" on page 2).

If white vertical streaks appear on the page:

•The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty (See "Cleaning the

inside" on page 2).

If vertical streaks appear on the page:

•The surface of the scanner glass and its

white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit

(See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 3).

Color or Black

background

If the amount of background shading becomes

unacceptable:

•Change to a lighter weight paper (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•Check the environmental conditions: very

dry conditions or a high level of humidity

(higher than 80% RH) can increase the

amount of background shading.

•Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a

new one (See "Replacing the toner

cartridge" on page 2). If this problem

persists, contact a service representative.

Condition Suggested Solutions

Troubleshooting_ 17

Toner smear If toner smears on the page:

•Clean the inside of the machine (See

"Cleaning the inside" on page 2).

•Check the paper type and quality (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•Remove the toner cartridge and then, install

a new one (See "Replacing the toner

cartridge" on page 2).

Vertical repetitive

defects

If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of

the page at even intervals:

•The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you

still have the same problem, remove the

toner cartridge and, install a new one (See

"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 2).

•Parts of the machine may have toner on

them. If the defects occur on the back of the

page, the problem will likely correct itself

after a few more pages.

•The fusing assembly may be damaged.

Contact a service representative.

Background

scatter

A

Background scatter results from bits of toner

randomly distributed on the printed page.

•The paper may be too damp. Try printing

with a fresh ream of paper. Do not open

reams of paper until necessary so that the

paper does not absorb too much moisture.

•If background scatter occurs on an envelope,

change the printing layout to avoid printing

over areas that have overlapping seams on

the reverse side. Printing on seams can

cause problems.

•If background scatter covers the entire

surface area of a printed page, adjust the

print resolution through your software

application or in Printing Preferences (See

"Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

Misformed

characters

•If characters are improperly formed and

producing hollow images, the paper stock

may be too slick. Try different paper (See

"Print media specifications" on page 3).

•If characters are improperly formed and

producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may

need service (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on

page 3).

Condition Suggested Solutions

Page skew

AaBbC

AaBbC

AaBbC

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

•Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

•Check the paper type and quality (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too

loose against the paper stack.

Curl or wave •Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

•Check the paper type and quality. Both high

temperature and humidity can cause paper

curl (See "Print media specifications" on

page 3).

•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Wrinkles or

creases

•Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

•Check the paper type and quality (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Back of printouts

are dirty

Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the

machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 2).

Solid Color or

Black pages

A

•The toner cartridge may not be installed

properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.

•The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and install a new

one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on

page 2).

•The machine may require repair. Contact a

service representative.

Condition Suggested Solutions

Troubleshooting_ 18

Copying problems

Condition Suggested solution

Copies are too light

or too dark

Use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten or

darken the backgrounds of copies (See

"Changing the darkness" on page 1).

Smears, lines,

marks, or spots

appear on copies.

•If the defects are on the original, use

Darkness in Copy feature to lighten the

background of your copies (See "Changing

the darkness" on page 1).

•If there are no defects on the original, clean

the scan unit (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on

page 3).

Copy image is

skewed.

•Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the document

feeder.

•Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.

Blank copies print

out.

Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the document

feeder.

Image rubs off the

copy easily.

•Replace the paper in the tray with paper from

a new package.

•In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in

the machine for extended periods of time.

Frequent copy paper

jams occur.

•Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray.

Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh

supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if

necessary.

•Ensure that the paper is the proper type and

weight.

•Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper

remaining in the machine after a paper jam

has been cleared.

Toner cartridge

produces fewer

copies than

expected before

running out of toner.

•Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or

heavy lines. For example, your originals may

be forms, newsletters, books, or other

documents that use more toner.

•The scanner lid may be left open while copies

are being made.

•Turn the machine off and back on.

Loose toner •Clean the inside of the machine (See

"Cleaning the inside" on page 2).

•Check the paper type and quality (See "Print

media specifications" on page 3).

•Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a

new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge"

on page 2).

•If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

Character Voids

A

Character voids are white areas within parts of

characters that should be solid black:

•You may be printing on the wrong surface of

the paper. Remove the paper and turn it

around.

•The paper may not meet paper

specifications (See "Print media

specifications" on page 3).

Horizontal stripes

AaBbC

AaBbC

AaBbC

AaBbC

AaBbC

If horizontally aligned black streaks, white

streaks or smears appear:

•The toner cartridge may be installed

improperly. Remove the cartridge and

reinsert it.

•The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and install a new

one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on

page 2).

•The machine might had a minor shock

during printing or copying. There is no

problem with the machine. Try printing again.

•If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not

feed into the machine:

•Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

•Change the printer option and try again. Go

to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,

and set type to Thin (See "Opening printing

preferences" on page 2).

An unknown image

repetitively

appears on a few

sheets or loose

toner, light print, or

contamination

occurs.

Your machine is probably being used at an

altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.

The high altitude may affect the print quality,

such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the

correct altitude setting to your machine (See

"Altitude adjustment" on page 1).

Condition Suggested Solutions

Troubleshooting_ 19

Scanning problems

Condition Suggested solutions

The scanner does not

work.

•Make sure that you place the original to be

scanned face down on the scanner glass, or

face up in the document feeder.

•There may not be enough available memory

to hold the document you want to scan. Try

the Prescan function to see if that works.

Try lowering the scan resolution rate.

•Check that the machine printer cable is

connected properly.

•Make sure that the machine printer cable is

not defective. Switch the printer cable with a

known good cable. If necessary, replace the

printer cable.

•Check that the scanner is configured

correctly. Check scan setting in the

SmarThru Office or the application you want

to use to make certain that the scanner job

is being sent to the correct port (for example,

USB001).

The unit scans very

slowly.

•Check if the machine is printing received

data. If so, scan the document after the

received data has been printed.

•Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.

•Communication speed slows in scan mode

because of the large amount of memory

required to analyze and reproduce the

scanned image. Set your computer to the

ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It

will help to increase the speed. For details

about how to set BIOS, refer to your

computer user’s guide.

Message appears on

your computer

screen:

•Device can’t be

set to the H/W

mode you want.

•Port is being used

by another

program.

•Port is Disabled.

•Scanner is busy

receiving or

printing data.

When the current

job is completed.,

try again.

•Invalid handle.

•Scanning has

failed.

•There may be a copying or printing job in

progress. Try your job again when that job is

finished.

•The selected port is currently being used.

Restart your computer and try again.

•The machine printer cable may be

improperly connected or the power may be

off.

•The scanner driver is not installed or the

operating environment is not set up properly.

•Ensure that the machine is properly

connected and the power is on, then restart

your computer.

•The USB cable may be improperly

connected or the power may be off.

Fax problems

condition suggested solutions

The machine is not

working, there is no

display, or the

buttons are not

working.

•Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

•Ensure that there is power being supplied to the

electrical outlet.

•Ensure that the power switch is turned on, and

the soft power switch on the control panel is

pressed.

No dial tone. •Check that the phone line is properly

connected.

•Check that the phone socket on the wall is

working by plugging in another phone.

The numbers stored

in memory do not

dial correctly.

Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory

correctly. Print a Addess Book list (See "Setting

up address book" on page 7).

The original does

not feed into the

machine.

•Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and

you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the

original is the right size, not too thick or thin.

•Make sure that the document feeder is firmly

closed.

•The document feeder rubber pad may need to

be replaced. Contact a service representative.

Faxes are not

received

automatically.

•The receiving mode should be set to fax.

•Make sure that there is paper in the tray.

•Check to see if the display shows any error

message. If it does, clear the problem

The machine does

not send.

•Make sure that the original is loaded in the

document feeder or on the scanner glass.

•Check the fax machine you are sending to, to

see if it can receive your fax.

The incoming fax

has blank spaces or

is of poor-quality.

•The fax machine sending you the fax may be

faulty.

•A noisy phone line can cause line errors.

•Check your machine by making a copy.

•A toner cartridge has almost reached its

estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner

cartridge (See "Replacing the toner cartridge"

on page 2).

Some of the words

on an incoming fax

are stretched.

The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary

document jam.

There are lines on

the originals you

sent.

Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (See

"Cleaning the scan unit" on page 3).

Troubleshooting_ 20

Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem

Condition suggested solution

Samsung Scan and

Fax Manager does

not work.

•Check your system requirements. Samsung

Scan and Fax Manager works in Window and

Macintosh (See "System requirements" on

page 2).

•Check that the Samsung Scan and Fax

Manager is installed by looking under “All

programs” in windows. If not installed and/or

working correctly, reinstalled using the CD

supplied with the product, or download the

latest version from the Samsung website.

(www.samsung.com/printer)

Common PostScript problems

The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when

several printer languages are used.

Problem Possible cause Solution

PostScript file

cannot be printed.

The PostScript

driver may not be

installed correctly.

•Install the PostScript

driver (See "Installing

USB connected

machine’s driver" on

page 3).

•Print a configuration

page and verify that

the PS version is

available for printing.

•Reinstall the PS

driver. If the problem

persists, contact a

service representative.

“Limit Check Error”

report prints.

The print job was

too complex.

You might need to

reduce the complexity of

the page or install more

memory (See "Installing

a memory module" on

page 5).

A PostScript error

page prints.

The print job may

not be PostScript.

Make sure that the print

job is a PostScript job.

Check to see whether

the software application

expected a setup or

PostScript header file to

be sent to the machine.

The optional tray is

not selected in the

driver.

The printer driver

has not been

configured to

recognize the

optional tray.

Open the PostScript

driver properties, select

the Device Options tab,

and set the tray option.

When printing a

document in

Macintosh with

Acrobat Reader 6.0

or higher, colors

print incorrectly.

The resolution

setting in the printer

driver may not be

matched with the

one in Acrobat

Reader.

Make sure that the

resolution setting in your

printer driver matches

the one in Acrobat

Reader.

Common Windows problems

Condition Suggested solutions

“File in Use”

message appears

during installation.

Exit all software applications. Remove all

software from the printer’s startup group, then

restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.

“General Protection

Fault”, “Exception

OE”, “Spool 32”, or

“Illegal Operation”

messages appear.

Close all other applications, reboot Windows

and try printing again.

“Fail To Print”, “A

printer timeout error

occurred” messages

appear.

These messages may appear during printing.

Just keep waiting until the machine finishes

printing. If the message appears in standby

mode or after printing has been completed,

check the connection and/or whether an error

has occurred.

The machine dials a

number, but the

connection with the

other fax machine

fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of

paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak

with the other machine operator and ask them to

solve the problem on their side.

Faxes do not store in

memory.

There may not be enough memory space to store

the fax. If the display indicating the memory status

shows, delete any faxes you no longer need from

the memory, and then try to store the fax again.

Call for service.

Blank areas appear

at the bottom of

each page or on

other pages, with a

small strip of text at

the top

You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in

the user option setting. For details about paper

settings (See "Setting the paper size and type" on

page 7).

condition suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 21

Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your

computer for further information on Windows error messages.

Common Linux problems

condition Suggested solutions

The machine does

not print.

•Check if the printer driver is installed in your

system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and

switch to the Printers tab in Printers

configuration window to look at the list of

available machines. Make sure that your

machine is displayed on the list. If not, open

Add new printer wizard to set up your

device.

•Check if the machine is started. Open

Printers configuration and select your

machine on the printers list. Look at the

description in the Selected printer pane. If its

status contains Stopped string, press the

Start button. After that normal operation of

the machine should be restored. The

“stopped” status might be activated when

some problems in printing occurred. For

instance, this could be an attempt to print a

document when the port is claimed by a

scanning application.

•Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional

components of machine (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access of different

user applications to the same port is possible.

To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them

at a time is allowed to gain control over the

device. The other user will encounter “device

busy” response. You should open ports

configuration and select the port assigned to

your machine. In the Selected port pane you

can see if the port is occupied by some other

application. If this is the case, you should

either wait for completion of the current job or

press the Release port button, if you are sure

that the present application is not functioning

properly.

•Check if your application has special print

option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified

in the command line parameter, then remove

it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select

“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command

line parameter in the command item.

•The CUPS (Common UNIXPrinting System)

version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2

(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet

Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket

printing instead of ipp or install a later version

of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).

Some color images

come out all black.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color

space of the document is indexed color space

and it is converted through CIE color space.

Because Postscript uses CIE color space for

Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find

recent Ghostscript versions at

www.ghostscript.com.

Some color images

come out in

unexpected color.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color

space of the document is indexed RGB color

space and it is converted through CIE color

space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space

for Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find

recent Ghostscript versions at

www.ghostscript.com.

The machine does

not print whole

pages and its output

is half page printed.

It is a known problem that occurs when a color

printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of

Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to

bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug

688252.

The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.

8.52 or above. Download the latest version of

AFPL Ghostscript from

http://sourceforge.net/projects/gho

I cannot scan via

Gimp Front-end.

Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device

dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should

install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your

computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package

for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home

page. For the detailed information, refer to the

Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end

application.

If you wish to use another kind of scan

application, refer to application’s Help.

I encounter error

“Cannot open port

device file” when

printing a document.

Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR

GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.

Known versions of CUPS (Common UNIX

Printing System) server break the print job

whenever print options are changed and then try

to restart the job from the beginning. Since

Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing,

the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the

port locked and unavailable for subsequent print

jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the

port by selecting Release port in Port

configuration window.

condition Suggested solutions

Troubleshooting_ 22

Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further

information on Linux error messages.

Common Macintosh problems

condition Suggested solutions

The machine does

not print PDF files

correctly. Some

parts of graphics,

text, or illustrations

are missing.

Printing the PDF file as an image may enable

the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the

Acrobat printing options.

It will take longer to print when you print a

PDF file as an image.

The document has

printed, but the print

job has not

disappeared from

the spooler in Mac

OS X 10.3.2.

Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or

higher.

Some letters are not

displayed normally

during the cover

page printing.

Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover

page printing. The English alphabet and

numbers are displayed normally on the cover

page.

When printing a

document in

Macintosh with

Acrobat Reader 6.0

or higher, colors

print incorrectly.

Make sure that the resolution setting in your

machine driver matches the one in Acrobat

Reader.

Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for

further information on Macintosh error messages.

The machine does

not appear on the

scanners list.

•Ensure your machine is attached to your

computer, connected properly via the USB

port, and is turned on.

•Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is

installed in your system. Open Unified Linux

Driver configurator, switch to Scanners

configuration, then press Drivers. Make

sure that driver with a name corresponding to

your machine's name is listed in the window.

•Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional

components of machine (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access of different

user applications to the same port is possible.

To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them

at a time is allowed to gain control over the

device. The other user will encounter “device

busy” response. This usually happens when

starting a scan procedure. An appropriate

message box appears.

To identify the source of the problem, open

the Ports configuration and select the port

assigned to your scanner, port's symbol

/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation

displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1

relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at

/dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to

/dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth

sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you

can see if the port is occupied by another

application. If this is the case, you should

either wait for completion of the current job or

press the Release port button, if you are sure

that the present port applicaton is not

functioning properly.

The machine does

not scan.

•Ensure a document is loaded into the

machine, ensure your machine is connected

to the computer.

•If there is an I/O error while scanning.

condition Suggested solutions

Supplies and accessories_ 1

1.supplies and accessories

This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine.

This chapter includes:

•How to purchase

•Available supplies

•Available accessories

•Maintenance parts

•Replacing the toner cartridge

•Replacing the paper transfer belt

•Necessary precautions to take when installing accessories

•Activating the added accessories in printer properties

•Upgrading a memory module

•Installing a wireless network interface card

•Installing a hard disk

•Checking replaceable’s lifespan

Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your

sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories.

How to purchase

To order Genuine Samsung supplies, accessories and, maintenance parts,

contact your local Samsung dealer or the authorized retailer where you

purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies,

select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service.

Available supplies

When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of

supplies for your machine:

Type Average yieldaPart name

TONER

CARTRIDGES

Standard yield

•Average continuous

black cartridge yield:

2,500 standard pages

(Black)

•Average continuous

colored cartridge yield:

2,000 standard pages

(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)

K508(CLT-K508S): Black

C508(CLT-C508S): Cyan

M508(CLT-M508S):

Magenta

Y508(CLT-Y508S): Yellow

Region Ab

b.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus,

Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,

Hungary, Italy, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal,

Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.

:

K5082(CLT-K5082S):

Black

C5082(CLT-C5082S):

Cyan

M5082(CLT-M5082S):

Magenta

Y5082(CLT-Y5082S):

Yellow

TONER

CARTRIDGES

High yield

•Average continuous

black cartridge yield:

5,000 standard pages

(Black)

•Average continuous

colored cartridge yield:

4,000 standard pages

(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)

K508L(CLT-K508L): Black

C508L(CLT-C508L): Cyan

M508L(CLT-M508L):

Magenta

Y508L(CLT-Y508L):

Yellow

Region Ab:

K5082L(CLT-K5082L):

Black

C5082L(CLT-C5082L):

Cyan

M5082L(CLT-M5082L):

Magenta

Y5082L(CLT-Y5082L):

Yellow

Paper transfer

belt

Approx. 50,000 pages

When the transfer belt has

worn out with abrasion,

you need to change it. By

this time you may be

notified with the transfer

belt-related message on

the display.

CLT-T508

To replace a toner cartridge see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 2.

Depending on the options and percentage of image area, job mode

used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.

You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same

country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will

be incompatable with your machine since the system configurations

vary from country to country.

a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Type Average yieldaPart name

Supplies and accessories_ 2

Available accessories

You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s

performance and capacity.

Accessory function Part name

Memory module Extend your machine’s

memory capacity.

•CLX-6220 Series

-CLP-MEM201: 128 MB

-CLP-MEM202: 256 MB

•CLX-6250 Series

-ML-MEM150: 128 MB

-ML-MEM160: 256 MB

-ML-MEM170: 512 MB

Optional tray 2 If you are experiencing

frequent paper supply

problems, you can

attach an additional 500

sheets tray. You can

print documents in

various sizes and types

of print materials.

CLX-S6250A

Hard disk

(CLX-6250 Series

only)

Allows you to enhance

the machine’s capability

and print in various

ways.

ML-HDK300

IEEE 802.11 b/g

Wireless LAN

(CLX-6250 Series

only)a

a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available.

Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your

printer.

Allows you to connect

your printer to a

wireless network.

ML-NWA40L

Maintenance parts

To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the

machine.

Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized

service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The

warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it

has reached its “Average Yield”.

Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality

and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The

purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The

maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each

item has been met.

parts Average yielda

Fuser unit Approx. 100,000 pages

Document feeder friction pad Approx. 75,000 pages

Document feeder pick-up roller Approx. 20,000 pages

Pick-up roller (Multi-purpose tray, Tray1,

Optional tray 2)

Approx. 70,000 pages

Friction pad (Multi-purpose tray, Tray1,

Optional tray 2)

Approx. 70,000 pages

Replacing the toner cartridge

Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.

When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life.

•The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicates

which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.

•The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.

At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the

toner cartridge for your machine (See "Available supplies" on page 1).

1. Using the handle, completely open the front door.

2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the

cartridge from the machine.

If you open the front door, be careful not to touch the underneath

the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The temperature

of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your

a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,

application software, connecting method, media type, media size and

job complexity.

Supplies and accessories_ 3

skin.

When you open the front door and work inside the machine, it is

highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.

Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer

belt.

3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.

•Don't use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open the

print cartridge package. You could damage the surface of the

print cartridge.

•To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light for

more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to

protect it if necessary.

4. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly

inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge.

5. Place the print cartridge on a flat surface, as shown, and remove the

paper covering the print cartridge by removing the tape.

•If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash

clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

•Do not touch the surface, the OPC drum in the cartridge. If the

surface is contaminated, it might affect the printout quality. Use

the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.

6. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into

the opening in the machine. Ensure the color cartridge is placed in the

correct position, see label in picture below for the correct color position

for each cartridge.

Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the

machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into

place completely.

7. Close the front door. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Replacing the paper transfer belt

After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete, you have to replace

it.

•The transfer belt-related message appears on the display, telling it's

time for a replacement.

•The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you

the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced.

The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating

environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.

1. Open the front door.

If you leave the front door open for more than a few minutes, the

OPC drum in the toner cartridge can be exposed to light. This will

cause damage to the OPC drum. Close the front door should the

installation need to be halted for any reason.

2. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.

Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.

3. Remove a new paper transfer belt from its bag.

4. Remove the paper covering the paper transfer belt.

•Do not use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open the

paper transfer belt package. You could damage the surface of

Supplies and accessories_ 4

the paper transfer belt.

•Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.

5. Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt, align it with the slots

on the inside of the front door.

6. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and

firmly seated.

7. Close the front door to resume printing.

If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Necessary precautions to take when installing

accessories

•Disconnect the power cord.

To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the

power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external

accessories.

•Discharge static electricity.

The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or

memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or

removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your

body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any

device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before

finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static

electricity again.

•Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties.

After installing an accessory such as an optional tray, PS driver users

must do the additional setting. Go to the PS printer properties and set

the added accessory activated.

When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a

service component and needs to be replaced by an authorized

servicer. Do not change it by yourself.

There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect

type.

Activating the added accessories in printer

properties

After installing added accessories, you need to select it in the printer

properties of the printer driver in order to use it.

1. Install the driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on

page 3 or "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 3).

2. Click the Windows Start menu.

3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.

•For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

•For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and

Sound > Printers.

•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

4. Right-click your machine.

5. For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.

•For PS driver, select PS driver and right-click to open Properties.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,

select the Printer properties.

If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other

printer drivers connected with selected printer.

6. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.

7. In printer driver properties, set the necessary options.

8. Click OK.

Upgrading a memory module

Your machine supports DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module). Use this

memory module slot to install additional memory.

When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can add a memory

module to the vacant memory slot (See "Available accessories" on page 2).

We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM's. You may void

your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused

by third party DIMM's.

Supplies and accessories_ 5

Installing a memory module

1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

2. Remove the screws and remove the rear cover.

3. Remove the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to

the right.

1Control board

cover

4. Remove the new memory module from its bag.

5. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module in

the slot at about a 30-degree angle. Make sure that the notches of the

module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.

The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those

on an actual memory module and its slot.

6. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.

Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be

damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,

carefully try the previous procedure again.

7. Install the control board with the screw removed in step 3.

8. Install the rear cover with the screw removed in step 2.

9. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.

If you use the PS driver, you must activate the added memory in the

PS driver properties

(See "Activating the added accessories in printer properties" on

page 4).

Printing with the optional memory (CLX-6250 Series

only)

•You can only use this feature if you have installed the 512 MB

optional memory. (CLX-6250 Series only)

•After installing the optional memory, you can use advanced printing

features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a private

job in the printer properties window.

Job Settings

This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using

the 512 MB optional memory.

1.Open the document you want to print.

2.Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.

3.Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.

The basic print settings including the number of copies and print

range are selected within the Print window.

4.Access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on

page 2).

5.Click the Advanced tab then select Job Settings.

6.Select the Print Mode you want .

•Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the

optional memory.

•Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy.

You can print one copy first to check, than print the rest of copies

later.

•Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential

documents. You need to enter a password to print.

7.Select OK.

Controlling the active job queue

All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue

in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job from the

queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press left/right arrow until Job Management appears and press OK.

3.Press left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.

4.Press left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you want to

use appears and press OK.

If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified

4-digit password.

Use the left/right arrow to enter digits. When you press OK, the

cursor will move to the next character. When you finish

entering the password, press OK.

Supplies and accessories_ 6

If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password

appears. Reenter the correct password.

5.Press the left/right arrow until the desired setting appears and press

OK.

•Cancel: You can delete a file from the queue.

•Promote: You can select a job waiting in the active job queue and

change its print order so that it can be printed sooner.

•Release: You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified

time immediately. In this case, the job currently printing is

stopped and the selected job will be printed. This function is

available when the job is scheduled for later printing.

6.When Yes appears, press OK.

File Policy

You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you

proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory

already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can

rename or overwrite it.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Management and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Policy and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press

OK.

•Rename : If the optional memory already has the same name

when you enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a

different name that is automatically programmed.

•Overwrite : You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on optional memory as you store new job

information.

6.Press OK.

Installing a wireless network interface card

Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available.

Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought

your printer.

The machine is equipped with a network interface which allows you to use

your machine on a network. You can also purchase a wireless network

interface card to enable the use of the machine in wireless network

environments (See "Available accessories" on page 2).

Installing a wireless network interface card

1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

2. Remove the screws and remove the rear cover.

3. Remove the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to

the right.

1Control board

cover

4. Detach the dummy panel on your machine using a screwdriver. Be

careful when removing not to damage the plastic cover.

5. Take out a new wireless interface card from its bag.

6. Place the wireless network interface card into the card guide [below item

3], ensure the connector side of the card is to the right.

1wireless network interface

card connector

2wireless network interface

card

3wireless network interface

card guide

7. Align the wireless network card connector on the right side of the card

with the connector on the control board [1].

Press the wireless interface card [2] down firmly into the main connector

[1] until it is completely and securely in place.

1Connector

2Wireless

interface card

Supplies and accessories_ 7

8. Install the control board cover with the screws removed in step 3.

9. Install the rear cover with the screws removed in step 2.

10. Plug all the cables back into the machine, and turn the machine on.

11. Set the wireless network environment.

For information about configuring and using the printer on a

wireless network environment, refer to the Wireless network install

guide provided with the wireless network interface card. You can

also configure the network parameters on the control panel; see

the next column.

Configuring the machine’s wireless network

Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your

wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was

set when the wireless router(access point) was installed. If you do not know

about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up

your network.

To configure wireless parameters, you can use both control panel and

SyncThru™ Web Service.

Using the control panel

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Network and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Wireless and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight WLAN Settings and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to select the setup method you want is

highlighted and press OK.

•Wizard: The wireless network interface card in your printer

searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.

•Custom: You can configure the wireless settings according to your

needs.

Wizard mode

1.The wireless network interface card on your machine searches for

wireless network in the area and shows the results.

2.Press the up/down arrow to select a network you want to use in

Search List and press OK. You can select a network using SSID.

3.When None appears in WLAN Security on the display, press OK to

save your selection. go to step 6.

If you see another messages, go to the next step.

4.According to the network you select, WLAN security encryption type

will be WEP or WPA.

•In case of WEP, Press the up/down to selcet Open System or

SharedKey.

-Open System: Authentication is not used, and Encryption

may or may not be used, depending on the need for data

security. Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after

selecting Open System.

-SharedKey: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper

WEP Key can access the network. Enter the WEP Key using

number keypad after selecting SharedKey.

•In case of WPA, Enter the WPA Key using number keypad. The

Key length should be between 8 to 63 characters long.

5.Press OK.

6.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

•SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a

wireless network. Access points and wireless devices

attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use

the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.

•WEP : WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol

preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.

WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a

wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.

•WPA : WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret

key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also

uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES

(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.

Custom mode

1.Enter the SSID when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the display,

the name that identifies a wireless network. SSID is case-sensitive

so you need to enter it carefully. Press OK.

2.Select the type of wireless connections. Press the up/down arrow to

select the method of Operation Mode you want and press OK.

•Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each

other in a peer-to-peer environment. Go to step 3.

•Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each

other through an access point. Go to step 4.

3.Press the up/down arrow to select the method of Channel you want

and press OK. If you select Auto, the wireless network interface card

on your machine will automatically adjust the channels.

4.Press the up/down arrow to select the method of WLAN Security you

want and press OK.

•None: This is used when the validation of a wireless device’s

identity and data encryption are not required for your network.

Open system is used for IEEE 802.11 authentication.

•Static WEP: This uses the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

algorithm suggested by IEEE 802.11 standard for security. Static

WEP security mode requires a proper WEP key for data

encryption, decryption, and IEEE 802.11 authentication. Press

the left/right arrow to select the setup method you want in

Authentication and press OK.

Supplies and accessories_ 8

-Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may

or may not be used, depending on the need for data security.

Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting

Open System and then press OK.

-SharedKey: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper

WEP Key can access the network. Enter the WEP Key using

number keypad after selecting SharedKey and then press

OK.

•WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK: You can select WPA-PSK or

WPA2-PSK to authenticate the print server based on WPA

Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called

Pre Shared Key passphrase) which is manually configured on

the access point and each of its clients.

a. Press OK when WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK appears on the

bottom line of the display.

b. Press the up/down arrow to select TKIP or AES in Encryption

and press OK. If you select WPA2-PSK, press the up/down

arrow to select AES or TKIP + AES in Encryption and press

OK.

c. Enter the WPA Key using number keypad and press OK.

5.When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to the ready

mode. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please

ask the network administrator.

Disconnect the network cable (standard or crossover). Your

machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the

network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and

wired LAN simultaneously.

Now go to "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 3.

Using SyncThru™ Web Service

For information about configuring and using the machine on a wireless

network environment, refer to the Wireless network install guide

provided with the wireless network interface card. You can also

configure the network parameters on the SyncThru™ Web Service.

Installing a hard disk

Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the

print queue of the printer hard disk. This decreases the workload of the

computer. You can also use various print features, such as storing a job in

the hard disk, proofing a job, and printing private documents.

The order information is provided for optional hard disk (See "Available

accessories" on page 2).

Installing a hard disk

1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

2. Remove the screws and remove the rear cover.

3. Remove the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to

the right.

1Control board

cover

4. Take out a new hard disk from its plastic bag.

5. Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control

board. Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place.

6. Fasten down the hard disk with the screws supplied with your new hard

disk; then reinstall the covers removed in steps 2 and 3.

7. Reconnect the power cord and machine cable. Turn on the machine.

8. You must activate the added hard disk in the driver properties

(See "Activating the added accessories in printer properties" on page 4).

Printing with the optional hard disk

After installing the optional hard disk, you can use advanced printing

features, such as storing or spooling a print job to the hard disk,

proofing a job, and specifying of printing a private job in the printer

properties window.

Once you have stored files in the hard disk, you can easily print or

delete the stored files using the control panel of your printer.

Storing a job

You can store jobs on the hard disk.

1.Open the document you want to print.

2.Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.

3.Select your machine from Select Printer list.

4.Click Properties or Preferences.

5.Click the Advanced tab and click Job Setting.

6.Select the print mode you want from the drop-down list

(See "Using help" on page 3).

7.Enter the user’s name and file name.

8.Click OK until the Print window is displayed.

9.Click OK or Print to start printing.

Printing or deleting a stored job

You can print or delete jobs stored on the hard disk.

Supplies and accessories_ 9

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Management and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Stored Job and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the user’s name and file name

you want use and press OK.

If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified

4-digit password.

Use the up/down arrow to enter digits and use the left/right

arrow to move between digits. When you finish entering the

password, press OK.

If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password

appears. Reenter the correct password.

6.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press

OK.

•Print: You can print a stored job.

•Delete: You can delete a stored job.

7.When Yes appears, press OK.

Controlling the active job queue

All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue

in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job from the

queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Management and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Active Job and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the user’s name and file name

you want use and press OK.

If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified

4-digit password.

Use the up/down arrow to enter digits and use the left/right

arrow to move between digits. When you finnish entering the

password, press OK.

If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password

appears. Reenter the correct password.

6.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press

OK.

•Cancel: You can delete a file from the queue.

•Promote: You can select a job waiting in the active job queue and

change its print order so that it can be printed sooner.

•Release: You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified

time immediately. In this case, the job currently printing is

stopped and the selected job will be printed. This function is

available when the job is scheduled for later printing.

7.When Yes appears, press OK.

Form file

Form overlay are images stored in the printer hard disk drive (HDD) as a

special file format that can be printed in layers on any document.

Creating new form files

Use the steps below to create a new form overlay.

1.Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a

new form file.

2.To save the document as a form file, access Printing Preferences

(See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).

3.Click the Advanced tab, and select Advanced.

4.In the Advanced Output Options window, check Save as Form for

Overlay.

5.Click Search.

6.Type a file name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select

the destination path and click Save.

7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

8. A confirm message appears, click Yes to save.

The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk

drive.

If you click NO, the machine prints your form without saving.

9.A confirm message appears, click Yes to save.

The form file size must be the same as the document you print with

the form file.

Using form files on your machine’s hard disk

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Form Menu and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow until the item you want appears and press

OK.

•Off: Prints in normal mode.

•Single Form: Prints all page using the first form.

•Double Form: Prints the front page using the first form and the

back page using the second form.

6.Press Back.

7.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Select Form and press OK.

8.Press the up/down arrow until the item you want appears and press

OK.

9.Press the up/down arrow until the form file for the second form

appears and press OK.

File Policy

You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you

proceed with the job through hard disk drive (HDD). If the hard disk drive

(HDD) memory already has the same name when you entered a new file

name, you can rename or overwrite it.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Management and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight File Policy and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press

OK.

•Rename : If the hard disk drive (HDD) memory already has the

Supplies and accessories_ 10

same name when you enter a new file name, the file will be

saved as a different name that is automatically programmed.

•Overwrite : You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on hard disk drive (HDD) as you store new job

information.

6.Press OK.

Deleting residual image data

Image Overwrite is a security measure for customers who are

concerned about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or

private document.

1.Press Menu on the control panel.

2.Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Job Management and press

OK.

4.Press the up/down arrow to highlight Image Overwrite and press OK.

5.Press the up/down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press

OK.

•Immediate : All residual image data from the machine will be

erased immediately after each job has been processed.

•On Demand : This option provides an on-demand facility for a

system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in

hard disk drive (HDD) after this option enabled. All existing jobs

will be deleted regardless of their status and all job submissions

will be prohibited for the duration of the overwrite.

6.Press the up/down arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate.

Press the up/down arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On

Demand.

If you selected On Demand enabled, the machine confirms if

the overwrite feature starts now. Press the up/down arrow to

select Yes or No. If you select Yes, On Demand overwrite

starts as soon as you select Yes. If you select No, this feature

will be enabled.

7.Press OK.

Checking replaceable’s lifespan

If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the

number of pages the machine has printed. Replace the corresponding

parts, if necessary.

1. Press Menu on the control panel.

2. Press the up/down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK.

3. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK.

4. Press the up/down arrow to highlight Supplies Life and press OK.

5. Press the up/down arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.

6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.

Specifications_ 1

1.specifications

This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications.

This chapter includes:

•Hardware specifications

•Environmental specifications

•Electrical specifications

•Print media specifications

The specification values are listed below, specification are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in

information.

Hardware specifications

Item Description

Dimension Height 651 mm (25.63 inches)

Depth 498 mm (19.61 inches)

Width 468 mm (18.43 inches)

Weight Machine with consumables 37.40 Kg (82.45 lbs)

Package weight Paper 5.8 Kg (12.7 lbs)

Plastic 1.8 Kg (3.9 lbs)

Environmental specifications

Item Description

Noise Levela

a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.

Ready mode 35 dB(A )

Printing mode •CLX-6220 Series: 53 dB(A)

•CLX-6250 Series: 54 dB(A)

Temperature Operation 15 to 32 °C (59 to 89.6 °F)

Storage (Packed) -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104°F)

Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH

Storage (Packed) 10 to 90% RH

Electrical specifications

Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and

void the product warranty.

Item Description

Power ratinga110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V

220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V

Specifications_ 2

Power consumption Average operating mode •CLX-6220 Series: Less than 550 W

•CLX-6250 Series: Less than 580 W

Ready mode •CLX-6220 Series: Less than 33 W

•CLX-6250 Series: Less than 38 W

Power save mode •CLX-6220 Series: Less than 11 W

•CLX-6250 Series: Less than 13 W

Power off mode Less than 1 W

a.See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine.

Item Description

Specifications_ 3

Print media specifications

Type Size Dimensions Print media weight ba

a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), load a paper into the multi-purpose tray one by one.

/Capacity

Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond)

•250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) for tray1

•500 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) for optional tray.

70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond)

•100 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs bond)

Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)

Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)

JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond)

•250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond)

ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)

A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond)

•250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) for tray1

•Not available in optional tray.

Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)

A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)

Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches) Not available in tray1 / optional

tray. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond)

•10 sheets

Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)

Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)

Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)

Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)

Envelope No. 9 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)

Envelope 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.5 inches)

Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)

•250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) f or tray1.

•500 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) for optional tray.

90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)

•40 sheets

Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond)

•250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) f or tray1.

•500 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lbs

bond) for optional tray.

60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond)

•100 sheets

Thicker paper Refer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 / optional

tray. 106 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond)

•10 sheets

Extra thick Refer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 170 g/m2 (32 to 46 lbs bond)

•10 sheets

LabelscRefer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond)

•10 sheets

Card stock Refer to the Plain paper

section

Refer to the Plain paper section 171 to 220 g/m2 ( 46 to 59 lbs bond)

•5 sheets

Glossy Photo,

Matte Photo

Refer to the Plain paper

section

100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 inches) 111 to 220 g/m2 ( 30 to 59 lbs bond)

•1 sheet

Minimum size (custom) 98 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 inches)

Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

tray1 / optional tray multi-purpose tray

Specifications_ 4

b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.

c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 1

1.administrator’s guide (windows only)

This chapter gives helpful information and troubleshooting tips for system administrators using Samsung Installer.

Overview

Samsung provides convenient installation methods useful for

administrators. Administrators can remotely install the machine driver to

multiple client computers or use command window to install the driver at

once. Administrators can also make their own installation package for

distribution.

Check the system requirements before installing the machine’s driver (See

"System requirements" on page 2).

Remote installation

Remote Installation is provided under Administrator Installation menu. It

is provided for administrators to remotely install device drivers and

application software to multiple client computers. To use remote installation,

you must configure at least one group. Multiple client computers can be

added to a group that has the same installation configuration. Installation

configuration includes device drivers or application software to be installed,

port used for printing, default printer, printer name, sharing information and

etc.

For remote installation, all client computers must be joined to a

domain or a workgroup and file sharing must be enabled to be

accessed by remote installer software on both server and client sides.

If you cannot access the client computers, you might need to disable

the Firewall option on the client computers.

Domain remote installation

You need to be a member of domain administrator to use Domain

Remote Installation.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and

powered on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the

User Account Control windows.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Yes in the User Account Control windows.

3. Select Administrator Installation > Remote Installation.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

5. Select Client Group window appears.

6. Click New Group.

To use remote installation, you need at least a group. If you have

already created a group, load the group you want and go to step 16.

•Edit Group: You can edit groups.

•Load Group: You can load groups.

•Delete Group: You can delete groups.

7. Log on window appears. Select Domain Remote Installation and type

in the administrator’s Domain, ID and Password.

If your company has no domain network environment, you can use

Workgroup Remote Installation (See "Workgroup Remote

Installation" on page 2).

8. Click Next.

9. Select Clients window appears.

10. Type in the group name in the Group Name field.

11. Add the client computers to be in the group to the right side panel.

•You can click … button to search the client computers and add

button to add a client computer by typing the IP address or the

computer name of client.

•You can add up to 50 client computers in a group. If you want to

add more than 50 client computers, you need to create more

groups.

•If the firewall is enabled on the client computer, access may be

denied.

•The client computer’s operating system should be Windows 2000

or higher.

•C drive must be shared as C$.

12. Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears.

Select the driver(s) and application software(s) you want to install and

click Next.

13. Select Printer connection window appears.

Select the printer connection type and click Next.

•If you selected Network Connection, Search Network Printers

window appears, type in the IP address or host name in the

information field than click Search. when you are finished, click

Next.

•The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same

subnet. If you want to specify a network printer that is located over

subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly.

14. Confirm Group details window appears.

Check the group information and click Next.

Location to save the group shows the path of default folder

which stores the created group information. The group information

file will be created as “<group_name>.RGI. You can change the

path by clicking the Change button.

15. Select Client Group window appears again.

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 2

16. Select the group(s) and click Next to start remote installation.

Remote installation begins, you can see the installation status from the

window.

17. When installation is completed, Results of remote installation window

appears.

Check the result. For failed client computers, you can reinstall again by

clicking the Reinstall button.

For failed client computers, you can check the log file which is

created in the client computers.

Workgroup Remote Installation

You can also use remote installation method with workgroups.

If your company has no domain network environment, you should use

Workgroup Remote Installation.

If the client computer uses Windows Vista or higher, ID should be

Administrator.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and

powered on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the

User Account Control windows.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Yes in the User Account Control windows.

3. Select Administrator Installation > Remote Installation.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

5. Select Client Group window appears.

6. Click New Group.

To use remote installation, you need at least a group. If you have

already created a group, load the group you want and go to step 16.

•Edit Group: You can edit groups.

•Load Group: You can load groups.

•Delete Group: You can delete groups.

7. Log on window appears. Select Workgroup Remote Installation and

type in the Workgroup, ID and Password.

•For Windows XP/2000/2003, the ID should be of a member of

Administrators group for operating computers and for Windows

Vista/2008/7, the ID should be of the default administrator

account named Administrator.

•You can also use Domain Remote Installation (See "Domain

remote installation" on page 1).

8. Click Next.

9. Select Clients window appears.

10. Type in the group name in the Group Name field.

11. Add the client computers to be in the group to the right side panel.

•You can click … button to search the client computers and add

button to add the client computer by typing the IP address or

the computer name of client.

•You can add up to 50 client computers in a group. If you want to

add more than 50 client computers, you need to create more

groups.

•If the firewall is enabled on the client computer, access may be

denied.

•The client computer’s operating system should be Windows 2000

or higher.

•If you have grouped the client computers in a workgroup and you

try to connect to the client computer, a pop up window asking

you to enter an Administrator's ID/password of the client

computer you selected will appear if you can't access through

the password you set in step 7.

•C drive must be shared as C$.

12. Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears.

Select the driver(s) and application software(s) you want to install and

click Next.

13. Select Printer connection window appears.

Select the printer connection type and click Next.

•If you selected Network Connection, Search Network Printers

window appears, type in the IP address or host name in the

information field than click Search. when you are finished, click

Next.

•The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same

subnet. If you want to specify a network printer that is located over

subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly.

14. Confirm Group details window appears.

Check the group information and click Next.

Location to save the group shows the path of default folder

which stores the created group information. The group information

file will be created as “<group_name>.RGI. You can change the

path by clicking the Change button.

15. Select Client Group window appears again.

16. Select the group(s) and click Next to start remote installation.

Remote installation begins, you can see the installation status from the

window.

17. When installation is completed, Results of remote installation window

appears.

Check the result. For failed client computers, you can reinstall again by

clicking the Reinstall button.

For failed client computers, you can check the log file which is

created in the client computers.

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 3

Error log messages

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Connection

Error

Unable to bind the socket.

[Port number:..]

Restart the client

computer.

Unable to listen the

socket. [Port number:..]

Unable to connect to the

client computer.

Client computer’s socket is

closed.

Setup Error Unable to access the

default shared folder(C$)

in the client computer.

•Check if C drive

folder is shared as

C$.

•Check if you can

remotely access the

client computer’s C$

folder on a network

browser.

Unable to copy service

files.

Check if you can

remotely access the

client computer’s C$

folder on the network

browser.

Unable to start the service

on the client computer.

Check whether

RMInstallService

program is running from

Services. (From the

Windows Start menu,

select Control Panel >

Administrative Tools >

Services).

If RMInstallService is

stopped then restart it

and try remote

installation again.

If you can't restart

RMInstallService, then

reboot client computer

and try remote

installation again.

Unable to create thread for

monitoring.

Restart the client

computer.

Unable to share folder on

client computer.

Check if the shared

folder in the client

computer can be shared

with full control.

Unable to copy Installation

files.

Unable to execute the

setup file normally.

•Check if the same

model’s installer is

running.

•Check if the installer

is waiting for a user

input.

Unable to get

profile

N/A Check if the

environment of client

computer is supported

for installation.

OS not

supported

Internet

Explorer not

supported

MSXML not

supported

Insufficient free

space

Not

Administrator

Create Customized Installer

Create Customized Installer allows administrators to create their own

installation package with the installation setting you want. You can choose

the drivers or software to be installed, assigned printer, printer name,

sharing options, default printer and so on.

The created installation package can be distributed as a single

self-extraction EXE package to clients through file servers or special

distribution servers. You can also create an install script file for silent

installation.

Creating a setup package

You can create a setup package from CD to a local folder. The created

setup package will include only selected device drivers or application.

There are two types of setup package you can create. Normal(setup.exe)

and Self-Extraction Package. Normal(setup.exe) will extract only

selected driver or application files from CD. Self-Extraction Package will

package like normal installation CD package as a single self-extractable

setup.exe file.

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and

powered on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the

User Account Control windows.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Yes in the User Account Control windows.

3. Select Administrator Installation > Create Customized Installer.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Message Meaning Suggested solutions

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 4

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

5. Select Package Type window appears.

Select Normal(setup.exe) or Self-Extraction Package.

If you place the mouse cursor over the package type, you can see the

detailed information on the bottom right side of the window.

6. Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears.

Check the device drivers or application software you want to included in

the setup package and click Next.

7. Select Printer connection window appears.

Select the printer connection type and click Next.

•If you selected Network Connection, Search Network Printers

window appears, type in the IP address or host name in the

information field than click Search. when you are finished, click

Next.

•The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same

subnet. If you want to specify a network printer that is located over

subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly.

If you can’t search network printers on the network then check

whether your firewall setting is disabled. If it is enabled, disable

firewall temporarily and try searching again.

8. Set Printer Drivers window appears. Click Next.

If necessary, configure printer name, sharing, shared name and default

printer setting. If you changed settings then you should click Apply

button to apply changes then click Next.

9. Summary window appears. Check the package information and click

Next to start creating the setup package.

You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button.

Check the Install the package as silent mode, if you want to

make the installation package as a silent installation package.

Silent installation installs the driver automatically by the set option

without user intervention.

10. When creating the setup package is finished, Packaging Completed

window appears.

Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created

package to open automatically after it’s created.

11. Click Finish.

Creating a setup script file

You can generate setup configuration script file based on the CD image. It

can be used with Silent installation for distributing software to multiple client

computers. For example, you can upload a full CD setup files into a file

server then distribute batch file or log-on script file that executes silent

installation with this customized script file(ex: \\<file_server>\CD\setup.exe

/s /i”c:\temp\CONFIG.CI3).

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and

powered on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the

User Account Control windows.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Yes in the User Account Control windows.

3. Select Administrator Installation > Create Customized Installer.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

5. Select Package Type window appears.

Select Generate a Setup script file.

If you place the mouse cursor over the package type, you can see the

detailed information on the bottom right side of the window.

6. Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears.

Check the device drivers or application software you want to included in

the setup package and click Next.

7. Select Printer connection window appears.

Select the printer connection type and click Next.

•If you selected Network Connection, Search Network Printers

window appears, type in the IP address or host name in the

information field than click Search. when you are finished, click

Next.

•The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same

subnet. If you want to specify a network printer that is located over

subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly.

•If you can’t search network printers on the network then check

whether your firewall setting is disabled. If it is enabled, disable

firewall temporarily and try searching again.

•Setup configuration script filename is set as CONFIG.CI3 and it’s

not changeable.

8. Set Printer Drivers window appears. Click Next.

If necessary, configure printer name, sharing, shared name and default

printer setting. If you changed settings then you should click Apply

button to apply changes then click Next.

9. Summary window appears. Check the package information and click

Next to start creating the setup package.

You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button.

Check the Install the package as silent mode, if you want to

make the installation package as a silent installation package.

Silent installation installs the driver automatically by the set option

without user intervention.

10. When creating the setup package is finished, Packaging Completed

window appears.

Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created

package to open automatically after it’s created.

11. Click Finish.

Modifying a setup script file

1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and

powered on.

2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window

appears.

•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 5

•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2

click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.

Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents

your CD-ROM drive and click OK.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the

User Account Control windows.

•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Yes in the User Account Control windows.

3. Select Administrator Installation > Create Customized Installer.

If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the

License Agreement. Then, click Next.

5. Select Package Type window appears.

Select Modify Script.

If you place the mouse cursor over the package type, you can see the

detailed information on the bottom right side of the window.

6. Open the script file you want to modify(ex:CONFIG.CI3).

CONFIG.CI3 script file will exist in \Setup\Script subfolder of the

created setup package.

7. Select Printer connection window appears.

Select the printer connection type and click Next.

•If you selected Network Connection, Search Network Printers

window appears, type in the IP address or host name in the

information field than click Search. when you are finished, click

Next.

•The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same

subnet. If you want to specify a network printer that is located over

subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly.

•If you can’t search network printers on the network then check

whether your firewall setting is disabled. If it is enabled, disable

firewall temporarily and try searching again.

•Setup configuration script filename is set as CONFIG.CI3 and it’s

not changeable.

8. Set Printer Drivers window appears. Click Next.

If necessary, configure printer name, sharing, shared name and default

printer setting. If you changed settings then you should click Apply

button to apply changes then click Next.

9. Summary window appears. Check the package information and click

Next to start creating the setup package.

You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button.

10. When creating the setup package is finished, Packaging Completed

window appears.

Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created

package to open automatically after it’s created.

11. Click Finish.

Silent installation Mode

Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any

user intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and

software are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the

silent installation by typing /s or /S in the command window. Silent

installation can also be performed by using the command script file

(See"Create Customized Installer" on page 3).

Command-line Parameters

Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window

or in making a script file (See "Creating a setup script file" on page 4).

Following command-line are effective and operated when command is

used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can

be operated solely.

Command-

line Definition Description

/s or

/S

Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers

without prompting any UIs

or user intervention.

/p”<port

name>” or

/P”<port

name>”

Specifies printer port.

Network Port will be

created by use of

Standard TCP/IP Port

monitor. For local port,

this port must exist on

system before being

specified by

command.

Printer port name can be

specified as IP address,

hostname, USB local port

name or IEEE1284 port

name.

For example

• /p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in

where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”

means IP address for

network printer.

/p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”,

/p”hostname”

•When installing the

driver silently in Korean,

type in-Setup.exe /s

/L"0x0012” or

Setup.exe /s /L"18” .

/l”<Lang_cod

e>” or

/L”<Lang_co

de>”

Sets language code.

The default language

will be decided

automatically if there

is no specified

installation language

commanded. The

default language

depends on your

system locale

information.

Decimal number and

hexadecimal number can

be used but hexadecimal

number must have prefix

with “0X”. Refer to

Language Codes section for

available <Lang_code>.

This command applies to all

machine’s drivers and

application software if

specified language is

supported. All software

included in the machine’s

drivers will be installed as

the specified language.

•Setup.exe /s /L"0x0012”

or Setup.exe /s /L"18” ;

install setup package

silently with Korean.

/a”<dest_pat

h>” or

/A”<dest_pat

h>”

Specifies destination path

for installation.

The destination path

should be a fully

qualified path.

Since machine drivers

should be installed on the

OS specific location, this

command applies to only

application software.

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 6

Language code

/i”<script

filename>” or

/I”<script

filename>”

Specifies customized install

script file for custom

operation.

The script filename

should be a fully

qualified filename.

Customized script file can

be assigned for customized

silent installation. This script

file can be created or

modified through provided

installer customizing utility

or by text editor.

Note: This customized

script file is prior than

default installer setting in

setup package but not prior

than command-line

parameters.

/n”<Printer

name>” or

/N”<Printer

name>”

Specifies printer name.

Printer instance shall be

created as specified printer

name.

With this parameter, you

can add printer instances as

your wishes.

/nd or

/ND

Commands not to set the

installed driver as a default

machine driver.

It indicates installed

machine driver will not be

the default machine driver

on your system if there are

one or more printer drivers

installed. If there is no

installed machine driver on

your system, then this

option won’t be applied

because Windows OS will

set installed printer driver as

a default machine driver.

/x or

/X

Uses existing machine

driver files to create printer

instance if it is already

installed.

This command provides a

way to install a printer

instance that uses installed

printer driver files without

installing an additional

driver.

/up”<printer

name>” or

/UP”<printer

name>”

Removes only specified

printer instance and not the

driver files.

This command provides a

way to remove only

specified printer instance

from your system without

effecting other printer

drivers. It will not remove

printer driver files from your

system.

/d or

/D

Uninstalls all device drivers

and applications from your

system.

This command will remove

all installed device drivers

and application software

from your system.

/v”<share

name>” or

/V”<share

name>”

Shares installed machine

and add other available

platform drivers for Point &

Print.

It will install all supported

Windows OS platform’s

machine drivers to system

and share it with specified

<share name> for point and

print.

Command-

line Definition Description

/o or

/O

Opens Printers and Faxes

folder after installation.

This command will open

Printers and Faxes folder

after the silent installation.

/f”<log

filename>” or

/F”<log

filename>”

Specifies log filename.

The default log file is

created in the system temp

folder if not specified.

It will create a log file to a

specified folder.

/h, /H or /? Shows Command-line

Usage.

Code Language

0X0009 English

0X0012 Korean

0X0804 Simplified Chinese

0X0404 Traditional Chinese

0x040c French

0X0007 German

0X0010 Italian

0X000a Spanish

0X0013 Dutch

0X001D Swedish

0X0006 Danish

0X000b Finnish

0X0014 Norwegian

0X0019 Russian

0X0005 Czech

0X000e Hungarian

0X0008 Greek

0X0816 Standard Portuguese

0X0416 Brazilian Portuguese

0X0015 Polish

0X001F Turkish

0X0001 Arabic

0X000D Hebrew

0x0424 Slovenian

0X0418 Romanian

0X0402 Bulgarian

0X041A Croatian

0X081A Serbian

Command-

line Definition Description

Administrator’s Guide (Windows only)_ 7

Frequently Asked Question

Remote Installation related questions

No. Question Answer

1Client computers are not

listed in the list when

logging on as a domain.

Primary DNS address in all client

computers should be specified as

your domain server.

If the client computer is turned off,

turn it on.

2 “Cannot access” error

message appears during

workgroup remote

installation.

This error message appears if access

was denied. You should check the

settings of network access; sharing

and security model for local accounts.

•From the Windows Start menu,

click Control Panel >

Administrative Tools >Local

Security Policy > Local Policies

> Security Options > Network

access: Sharing and security

model for local accounts.

•If the setting is not Classic – local

users authenticate as

themselves, change it to Classic

– local users authenticate as

themselves.

3 “Cannot access” error

message appears during

domain / workgroup

remote installation

Check if the C drive folder is shared.

C Drive folder should be shared as

C$ to access remote client

computers.

Create Customized Installer related questions

No. Question Answer

1When I try to open the

CONFIG.CI3 script file,

the files doesn’t open and

a warning message pops

up.

When the Custom utility opens the

config.ci3 script file, it checks

manufacture, model and script file

type. Check the <MFG>,<MDL> node

of the file you want to open, and if

<SCRIPT_TYPE> value is ‘Config’.

2I cannot precede the next

step at Search Network

Printer dialog.

It checks if the IP address/hostname

is valid or not. You can specify only

the IP address/hostname which is

connected via network currently.

Check the connection status of the

printer to specify.

3When I execute the

customized installer

package, the welcome

dialog appears and I need

to select the options

again.

If you want to install as silent mode,

check the Install the package as

silent mode check box in the

Summary window.

0X0422 Ukraine

0X041B Slovakia

0X0421 Indonesian

0x041E Thai

0X0429 Farsi

Code Language

Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 1

contact samsung worldwide

If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.

Country/Regio

nCustomer Care Center Web Site

ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com/ar

AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/au

AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,

€ 0.07/min)

www.samsung.com/at

BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_r

u

BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be

(Dutch)

www.samsung.com/be_fr

(French)

BRAZIL 0800-124-421

4004-0000

www.samsung.com/br

CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/ca

CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl

CHINA 400-810-5858

010-6475 1880

www.samsung.com/cn

COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com.co

COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com/latin

CZECH

REPUBLIC

800-SAMSUNG

(800-726786)

www.samsung.com/cz

Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,

Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8

DENMARK 8-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/dk

ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com/latin

EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com/latin

ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee

KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru

KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500

FINLAND 30-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi

FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr

GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG

(726-7864 € 0,14/min)

www.samsung.de

GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com/latin

HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com/latin

HONG KONG 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk

www.samsung.com/hk_e

n/

HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/hu

INDIA 3030 8282

1800 110011

1800 3000 8282

www.samsung.com/in

INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 www.samsung.com/id

ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it

JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com/latin

JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com/jp

LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv

LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt

LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu

MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/my

MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/mx

MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_r

u

NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG

(0900-7267864) (€

0,10/min)

www.samsung.com/nl

NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726

786)

www.samsung.com/nz

NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com/latin

NORWAY 3-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/no

PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/latin

PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

1-800-3-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

1-800-8-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

02-5805777

www.samsung.com/ph

POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG

(172678)

022-607-93-33

www.samsung.com/pl

Country/Regio

nCustomer Care Center Web Site

Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 2

PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/pt

PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/latin

REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/latin

EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie

RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru

SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/sg

SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/sk

SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/za

SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172

678)

www.samsung.com/es

SWEDEN 0771 726 7864

(SAMSUNG)

www.samsung.com/se

SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,

CHF 0.08/min)

www.samsung.com/ch

TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500

TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com/tw

THAILAND 1800-29-3232

02-689-3232

www.samsung.com/th

TRINIDAD &

TOBAGO

1-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/latin

TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr

U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

8000-4726

www.samsung.com/ae

U.K 0845 SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/uk

U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG

(7267864)

www.samsung.com/us

UKRAINE 8-800-502-0000 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_r

u

UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru

VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com/latin

VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com/vn

Country/Regio

nCustomer Care Center Web Site

Glossary_ 1

glossary

The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by

understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well

as mentioned in this user’s guide.

802.11

802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)

communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards

Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g

802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.

802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps.

802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave

ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

Access point

Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that

connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local

area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of

WLAN radio signals.

ADF

An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will

automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can

scan some amount of the paper at once.

AppleTalk

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for

computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)

and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

BIT Depth

A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to

represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color

depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits

increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for

a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and

white.

BMP

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows

graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file

format on that platform.

BOOTP

Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to

obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap

process of computers or operating systems running on them. The

BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each

client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP

address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD

Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan

job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to

prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Collation

Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When

collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing

additional copies.

Control Panel

A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or

monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of

the machine.

Coverage

It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.

For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%

image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or

lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a

toner usage will be as much as the coverage.

CSV

Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to

exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is

used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the

industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

DADF

A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will

automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the

machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

Default

The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box

state, reset, or initialized.

DHCP

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server

networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters

specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information

required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also

provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

DIMM

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds

memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,

received fax data.

Glossary_ 2

DNS

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information

associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,

such as the Internet.

Dot Matrix Printer

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head

that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an

ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

DPI

Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for

scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher

resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

DRPD

Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone

company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to

answer several different telephone numbers.

Duplex

A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that

the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer

equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one

print cycle.

Duty Cycle

Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer

performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation

such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of

print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty

cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer

limits 2,400 pages a day.

ECM

Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into

Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and

corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes

caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation

Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as

another.

An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different

system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.

Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is

in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the

system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local

area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical

layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control

(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized

as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in

use during the 1990s to the present.

EtherTalk

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer

networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now

deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

FDI

Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to

allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card

reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.

FTP

A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for

exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol

(such as the Internet or an intranet).

Fuser Unit

The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It

consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred

onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that

the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm

when it comes out of a laser printer.

Gateway

A connection between computer networks, or between a computer

network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a

network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image

when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented

by various shades of gray.

Halftone

An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.

Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter

areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

HDD

Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard

disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data

on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an

international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement

of technology related to electricity.

IEEE 1284

The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to

a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to

the peripheral (for example, a printer).

Glossary_ 3

Intranet

A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and

possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of

an organization's information or operations with its employees.

Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal

website.

IP address

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in

order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing

the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a

printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer

can complete within one minute.

IPP

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for

printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so

forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of

printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and

encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution

than older ones.

IPX/SPX

IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet

Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare

operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services

similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and

SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for

local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this

purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

ISO

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an

international standard-setting body composed of representatives from

national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and

commercial standards.

ITU-T

The International Telecommunication Union is an international

organization established to standardize and regulate international radio

and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,

allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection

arrangements between different countries to allow international phone

calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.

ITU-T No. 1 chart

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile

transmissions.

JBIG

Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression

standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for

compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be

used on other images.

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used

standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the

format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide

Web.

LDAP

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking

protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over

TCP/IP.

LED

A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates

the status of a machine.

MAC address

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated

with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually

written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,

00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network

Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers

trying to locate machines on large networks.

MFP

Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the

following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a

copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

MH

Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the

amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines

to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a

codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently

compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this

minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

MMR

Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method

recommended by ITU-T T.6.

Modem

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,

and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted

information.

MR

Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T

T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is

compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the

differences are encoded and transmitted.

Glossary_ 4

NetWare

A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used

cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the

network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.

Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

OPC

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual

image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is

usually green or rust colored and a cylinder shaped.

An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its

usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets

worn from grits of a paper and the drum cleaning blade.

Originals

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,

etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but

which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.

OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides

the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,

functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,

Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.

PABX

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone

switching system within a private enterprise.

PCL

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language

(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an

industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has

been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and

xerographic printers.

PDF

Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed

by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a

device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript

PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming

language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -

that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

Printer Driver

A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer

to the printer.

Print Media

The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can

be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

PPM

Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining

how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can

produce in one minute.

PRN file

An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the

device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies

many tasks.

Protocol

A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,

communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.

PS

See PostScript.

PSTN

The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the

world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial

premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

RADIUS

Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for

remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables

centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and

passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting)

concept to manage network access.

Resolution

The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The

higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

SMB

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to

share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications

between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated

Inter-process communication mechanism.

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail

transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,

text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are

specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server

protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.

SSID

Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network

(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to

communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a

maximum length of 32 characters.

Glossary_ 5

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to

determine which part of the address is the network address and which

part is the host address.

TCP/IP

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);

the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack

on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR

Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each

transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of

pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after

failed transmissions.

TIFF

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped

image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from

scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the

characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and

platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been

made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge

A kind of bottle or container within a machine like a printer which

contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and

photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper.

Toner can be fused by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the

fibers in the paper.

TWAIN

An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a

TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can

be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft

Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path

Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network

shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a

UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>

URL

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents

and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates

what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the

domain name where the resource is located.

USB

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the

USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.

Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a

single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Watermark

A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears

lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first

introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by

papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,

currency, and other government documents to discourage

counterfeiting.

WEP

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE

802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP

provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as

it is transmitted from one end point to another.

WIA

Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is

originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be

initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant

scanner.

WPA

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless

(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the

security features of WEP.

WPA-PSK

WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small

business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the

wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop

devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a

wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.

XPS

XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description

Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for

portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It

is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a

vector-based device-independent document format.